Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 1 / 280

THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

Installation Manual

Document Rev.44

FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.p.A.

S.S. 235 km.8 - 27010 Albuzzano (PV) - ITALY
 +39 0382 434111  +39 0382 434150  http://www.fedegari.com

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 2 / 280

DOCUMENT REVISION LIST

44 26/05/2017 ABR #100978.45 Updated Configuration Menu with DNS

43 19/07/2016 ABR #100978.44 Updated Configuration Menu
42 15/12/2015 ADN #100978.43 Add Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F
41 02/02/2015 ADN #100978.42 Update BIOS for B&R APC810 to support new version of
applicomIO Profibus card, generation 2 PCU-DP2IO (DR2-
DPM-PCU)
40 12/01/2015 ADN #100978.41 Update to W41
39 12/02/2014 RDB #100978.40 Add B&R APC 810
38 20/12/2013 RDB #100978.39 Update configuration menu to W40.1
37 04/10/2013 RDB #100978.38 Add Thermal printer CUSTOM PLUS4
36 05/06/2013 RDB #100978.37 Updated Configuration menu to manage customer
documents and to configure the log function that
allows debugging of PGs
Changed Configuration Menu and Recovery Disk to
handle historic alarms for backups and archive
management
35 07/11/2012 RDB #100978.36 Added TH4-VHP Steris Profibus/MPI Interface
Installation
34 22/12/2011 ABR #100978.35 Added DP/DP Coupler
33 04/11/2011 ABR #100978.34 Added APPENDIX C for W36.1 Configuration Menu
32 04/08/2011 ABR #100978.33 Added PDF settings to Configuration Menu and
distribution of PDF signature certificate
31 16/05/2011 RDB #100978.32 Added APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250
30 07/02/2011 RDB #100978.31 Updated BIOS menu for AB VersaView 1500P Ser.E

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 3 / 280

29 10/01/2011 RDB #100978.30 Extended GUI Remote OS to Windows 7

28 15/11/2010 RDB #100978.29 Added the software patch kit in section 7
27 06/05/2010 RDB #100978.28 Added panel PC Siemens Simatic IPC577C, added
in section 4.2.8 important note on booting for panel
PC Proface PS3650A-T41, updated section 5 on
configuration Menu and added section 10 - Appendix
B for configuration menu for software versions
previous W30
26 15/02/2010 ABR #100978.27 Added in section 6.2.2 important note on booting
from USB Recovery Disk.
25 09/10/2009 RDB #100978.26 Update the description of HW supported, add
subsection 3.3.7 on power supply for Added Allen
Bradley Versa View 1500P Ser.E
24 06/07/2009 ABR #100978.25 Added Allen Bradley Versa View 1500P Ser.E
23 27/03/2009 ABR #100978.24 Updated to W30 (changed Configuration Menu,
added TH4RStart installation)
22 10/03/2009 DAR/RDB/ #100978.23 Add Upgecprn installation procedure
MGH Add paragraph BIOS battery replacement
Removed table “PCs used in the THEMA4 Control
System”, update firmware configuration for APS
printer
21 22/12/2008 ABR #100978.22 Added important notes in BIOS setup for Panel PC
Allen Bradley Ser.A
20 01/12/2008 ABR #100978.21 Upadated BIOS for Proface PS3650A-T41
19 03/11/2008 ABR #100978.20 Added Proface PS3650A, printer APS CP424HRS
and Recovery Disk on USB key
18 27/06/2008 OLK/MGH #100978.19 Removed document opening problem, no change of
document contents
17 16/04/2008 OLK/MGH #100978.18 Document revision
16 28/02/2007 ABR #100978.17 Updated to W28 (changes to configuration menu,
IPAQ-L PLUS and LCD)
15 05/10/2007 ABR #100978.16 Updated to W27 (changes to configuration menu,
printer firmware management and new LCD)
14 17/09/2007 LCA #100978.15 Add RAM expansions KIT
13 25/10/2006 RDB #100978.14 Modified “System tuning” for Recovery Disk 04
12 28/09/2006 RDB #100978.13 Modified “Panel PC installation” part for panel PC
SIEMENS IL 70 and VERSAVIEW 1500P
11 02/08/2006 RDB #100978.12 Add BIOS and TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION for
panel PC SIEMENS PC577 for W23.2
10 01/08/2006 RDB #100978.11 Add SIEMENS PC577 panel PC
9 03/07/2006 ABR #100978.10 Updated to W23.1 (custom language and online
manuals)
8 02/05/2006 ABR #100978.9 Updated to W23 and Recovery Disk 03 (USB
support)
7 20/03/2006 LCA #100978.8 Add default IP address (ch. 4.3.1.4)
6 17/02/2006 MGH #100978.7 Revision of document contents and layout
5 18/11/2005 ABR #100978.6 Added section about equipment configuration
4 04/11/2005 ABR #100978.5 Added Proface PS-2000B
3 09/02/2005 ABR #100978.4 Added Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.B,
updated to Recovery disk 02
2 03/08/2004 ABR #100978.3 Updated to W13 version, added Recovery disk
1 14/05/2004 RDB #100978.2 Add Allen-Bradley Panel PC BIOS Setup
0 22/03/2004 OLK #100978.1 First Edition
Revision Date Name Document
Revision Subject
no. (dd/mm/yyyy) Initials Code

FEDEGARI has made every effort to ensure that the information contained in this manual is accurate and exhaustive. However, it assumes
no responsibility in case of errors or omissions. FEDEGARI reserves itself the right to amend, at any time and without notice, the
informations regarding the hardware and software described in this document. FEDEGARI reserves itself the option of amending this manual
at any time without notice.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 4 / 280

DOCUMENT SECTIONS
1 PREFACE
This section is a small explanatory introduction.

2 CONTROL SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

This section describes the Thema4 controller’s hardware and software components

3 THEMA4 HARDWARE SETUP

This section contains the control system's hardware setup procedure.

4 THEMA4 SOFTWARE SETUP

This section contains the control system's software installation procedure.

5 CONFIGURATION MENU
This section explains the operations of Thema4's internal configuration menu.

6 RECOVERY DISK
This section describes the use of the recovery disk which is an autobooting floppy that allows to perform a
set of operations on Thema4.

7 CD SOFTWARE SUPPLY
The software to be installed can be shipped on a CD suited both for floppy installation and network
installation and can be used both for first installation and software upgrade.
Additionally a second CD can be shipped to let the user install “On line Manuals” both on the Panel PC
and on the Remote GUI.

8 MISCELLANEOUS
FTP SERVER CONFIGURATION
To perform software installation or data backup-through-network, an FTP server properly configured and
running on a host machine is needed. The control system is able to connect to the host by means of an
Ethernet network provided that IP addresses are choosen properly. Information in this section applies
both to RECOVERY DISK and CONFIGURATION MENU.
USB DEVICES
Starting from W23 software release and Recovery Disk version 03 USB devices are supported. Both USB
devices 1.1 and 2.0 are supported but, depending on the Panel PC, it is possible that devices 2.0 are not
operated at the maximum speed.
UPGCEPRN V1.5 for THERMAL PRINTER CUSTOM TPT112HP INSTALLATION
Installation procedure for the software tool Upgceprn v1.5 for thermal printer TPT112HP
FLASHINGUTILITY INSTALLATION
Installation procedure for the software tool FlashingUtility
UPGCEPRN V2.14 for THERMAL PRINTER CUSTOM PLUS4 INSTALLATION
Installation procedure for the software tool Upgceprn 2.14 for thermal printer PLUS4
THEMA4-VHP STERIS PROFIBUS/MPI INTERFACE INSTALLATION
Installation procedure for the TH4-VHP Steris Profibus/MPI Interface software

9 APPENDIX A – REMOTE GUI INSTALLATION

This section describes installation and uninstallation of Remote GUI software (TH4RStart).

10 APPENDIX B – CONFIGURATION MENU FOR SOFTWARE VERSIONS PREVIOUS W30

This section explains the operations of Thema4's internal configuration menu for software versions
previous W30

11 APPENDIX C – CONFIGURATION MENU FOR SOFTWARE VERSION W36.1

This section describes differences in the Configuration Menu of the software version W36.1

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 5 / 280

INDEX
1 PREFACE........................................................................................................................................................13
1.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................14
1.2 NOTATIONS ...........................................................................................................................................14
2 CONTROL SYSTEM SPECIFICATION ..........................................................................................................15
2.1 HARDWARE COMPONENTS ................................................................................................................16
2.2 SOFTWARE COMPONENTS .................................................................................................................17
2.3 GUI REMOTE SOFTWARE ....................................................................................................................18
3 THEMA4 HARDWARE SETUP ......................................................................................................................19
3.1 HARDWARE SETUP PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................21
3.2 STEP 1 – PANEL PC INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................23
3.2.1 Panel PC “Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y” ............................................................................................24
3.2.2 Panel PC “Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70” ...................................................................................33
3.2.3 Panel PC “Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P” Ser.A-D ........................................................................36
3.2.4 Panel PC “Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P” Ser.E ............................................................................39
3.2.5 Blind PC “Pro-face PS-2000B” ...........................................................................................................43
3.2.6 Panel PC “Siemens PC 577” ..............................................................................................................48
3.2.7 Panel PC “Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41” .........................................................................................50
3.2.8 Panel PC “Siemens Simatic IPC577C” ...............................................................................................54
3.2.9 Blind PC “Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250” ...........................................56
3.2.10 Box PC “B&R APC 810” + Automation Panel 900 ..........................................................................60
3.2.11 Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F .............................................................................................63
3.3 STEP 2 – CONNECTION OF POWER SUPPLY TO PC AND UPS ........................................................67
3.3.1 Pro-face PL692x-T4y power supply....................................................................................................67
3.3.2 Siemens Industrial Lite 70 power supply ............................................................................................67
3.3.3 Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D power supply.....................................................................68
3.3.4 Blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B power supply .......................................................................................68
3.3.5 Siemens PC577 power supply............................................................................................................69
3.3.6 Pro-face PS3650A-T41 power supply ................................................................................................69
3.3.7 Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E power supply ........................................................................70
3.3.8 Siemens Simatic IPC577C power supply ...........................................................................................71
3.3.9 Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250 ............................................................72
3.3.10 Box PC “B&R APC 810” + Automation Panel 900 ..........................................................................72
3.3.11 Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F .............................................................................................73
3.4 STEP3 – CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O BOARD ...............................................................................74
3.4.1 Profibus connection by means of a D-SUB 9-pin connector. ............................................................74
3.4.2 Blackout signal connection. ................................................................................................................75
3.5 STEP4 – RS232 CONNECTION FOR DOOR SIDE 2 MESSAGE DISPLAY ..........................................76
3.6 STEP5 – RS232 CONNECTION FOR MODBUS COMMUNICATION (IF PRESENT) ...............................77
3.7 STEP6 – ETHERNET PORT NETWORK CONNECTION TO HUB (IF PRESENT)....................................78
4 THEMA4 SOFTWARE SETUP .......................................................................................................................79
4.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .........................................................................................81
4.1.1 Items required for software installation/configuration .........................................................................81
4.2 STEP 1 – PANEL PC BIOS SETUP ........................................................................................................82
4.2.1 Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y ...............................................................................................................82
4.2.2 Siemens Industrial Lite 70 ..................................................................................................................86
4.2.3 Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P - Ser.A .............................................................................................89
4.2.4 Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P - Ser.B,C,D .....................................................................................93
4.2.5 Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P - Ser.E .............................................................................................97
4.2.6 Pro-face Blind PC PS-2000B ..............................................................................................................99
4.2.7 Siemens PC577 ................................................................................................................................102
4.2.8 Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41..........................................................................................................105
4.2.9 Siemens Simatic IPC577C ...............................................................................................................110
4.2.10 Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250 ......................................................114
4.2.11 B&R APC 810 ...............................................................................................................................119
4.2.12 Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F ...........................................................................................................124
4.3 STEP 2 - SW INSTALLATION BY RECOVERY DISK...........................................................................129
4.3.1 Installation from floppy ......................................................................................................................130
4.3.2 Installation from network ...................................................................................................................131
4.3.3 Installation from USB device.............................................................................................................132
4.4 STEP 3 - PC CONFIGURATION BY “CONFIGURATION MENU“ ........................................................134
4.5 STEP 4 - SOFTWARE VERSIONS IDENTIFICATION .........................................................................135

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 6 / 280

4.6 STEP 5 - PT100/4-20MA CONVERTER CONFIGURATION .................................................................136

4.6.1 INOR IPAQ-L/L+ transmitter .............................................................................................................136
4.7 STEP 6 – MODULES/EQUIPMENTS CONFIGURATION BY GUI .......................................................137
4.7.1 General information ..........................................................................................................................137
4.7.2 Siemens ET200M .............................................................................................................................139
4.7.3 Siemens ET200S ..............................................................................................................................140
4.7.4 Allen Bradley Flex I/O .......................................................................................................................141
4.7.5 Allen Bradley POINT I/O ...................................................................................................................143
4.7.6 SMC EX250 ......................................................................................................................................144
4.7.7 SMC EX500 ......................................................................................................................................145
4.7.8 DP/DP COUPLER.............................................................................................................................147
4.7.9 SMC EX260 ......................................................................................................................................148
4.7.10 B&R X20+X67 ...............................................................................................................................149
4.7.11 SEW MOVIMOT............................................................................................................................150
4.7.12 Kawasaki ROBOTS ......................................................................................................................151
4.7.13 Siemens Safety PLC .....................................................................................................................151
4.7.14 Heidenhain Encoder .....................................................................................................................151
4.8 STEP 7 - SW COMPONENTS UPGRADE ............................................................................................152
4.9 STEP 8 – PRINTER FIRMWARE UPGRADE .......................................................................................153
4.9.1 Firmware configuration for CUSTOM TPT112HP printer .................................................................153
4.9.2 Firmware configuration for APS printer.............................................................................................154
4.9.3 Firmware configuration for CUSTOM PLUS4 printer........................................................................154
4.10 STEP 9 – LCD FIRMWARE UPGRADE ................................................................................................156
4.10.1 Firmware configuration for LCD MATRIX ORBITAL.....................................................................156
5 CONFIGURATION MENU.............................................................................................................................157
5.1 CONFIGURATION MENU FUNCTIONS ..............................................................................................158
5.2 CONFIGURATION MENU ACCESS.....................................................................................................159
5.3 CONFIGURATION MENU NAVIGATION AND USAGE .......................................................................160
5.3.1 Main menu ........................................................................................................................................161
5.3.2 Set device .........................................................................................................................................162
5.3.3 Software complete update ................................................................................................................164
5.3.4 Software objects update ...................................................................................................................165
5.3.5 Hardware configuration .....................................................................................................................168
5.3.6 Stations configuration .......................................................................................................................172
5.3.7 Authorization management ...............................................................................................................175
5.3.8 Data Backup .....................................................................................................................................177
5.3.9 Archive management ........................................................................................................................179
5.3.10 Special operations ........................................................................................................................182
5.3.11 Exit ................................................................................................................................................186
6 RECOVERY DISK .........................................................................................................................................187
6.1 RECOVERY DISK FUNCTIONS...........................................................................................................188
6.2 RECOVERY DISK MENU ACCESS .....................................................................................................189
6.2.1 Recovery Disk on floppy ...................................................................................................................189
6.2.2 Recovery Disk on USB key...............................................................................................................189
6.2.3 Recovery Disk startup page..............................................................................................................189
6.2.4 Compatibility issues ..........................................................................................................................190
6.3 RECOVERY DISK MENU NAVIGATION AND USAGE ........................................................................191
6.3.1 Main menu ........................................................................................................................................191
6.3.2 Software installation ..........................................................................................................................192
6.3.3 Software Update ...............................................................................................................................202
6.3.4 Authorization management ...............................................................................................................203
6.3.5 Backup ..............................................................................................................................................204
6.3.6 Archive management ........................................................................................................................205
6.3.7 System tuning ...................................................................................................................................206
6.3.8 Move archives ...................................................................................................................................209
7 CD SOFTWARE SUPPLY ............................................................................................................................217
7.1 CD SOFTWARE BACKUP PACKAGE..................................................................................................218
7.2 CD IDENTIFICATION ...........................................................................................................................219
7.2.1 Software backup CD identification ....................................................................................................219
7.3 CD INTERNAL STRUCTURE ...............................................................................................................220
7.3.1 Software CD internal structure..........................................................................................................220
7.4 USING THE CD FOR NETWORK INSTALLATION ..............................................................................222
7.5 DISKS CREATION FROM CD ..............................................................................................................223
7.6 TRANSFERRING CD ON A USB KEY ..................................................................................................224

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 7 / 280

7.7 SOFTWARE PATCH KIT ......................................................................................................................224

7.7.1 Software Patch Installation ...............................................................................................................224
8 MISCELLANEOUS .......................................................................................................................................225
8.1 FTP SERVER CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................226
8.1.1 Ethernet connection ..........................................................................................................................226
8.1.2 Connection check .............................................................................................................................227
8.1.3 Configuring an FTP server ................................................................................................................228
8.2 USB DEVICES ......................................................................................................................................230
8.2.1 General informations on USB devices ..............................................................................................230
8.2.2 Supported USB devices ....................................................................................................................230
8.2.3 Restrictions on number of USB devices ...........................................................................................230
8.3 UPGCEPRN V1.5 FOR THERMAL PRINTER CUSTOM TPT112HP INSTALLATION ..........................231
8.3.1 Installation procedure .......................................................................................................................231
8.4 FLASHINGUTILITY INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................236
8.4.1 Installation procedure .......................................................................................................................236
8.5 UPGCEPRN V2.14 FOR THERMAL PRINTER CUSTOM PLUS4 INSTALLATION ..............................238
8.5.1 Installation procedure .......................................................................................................................238
8.6 THEMA4-VHP STERIS PROFIBUS/MPI INTERFACE INSTALLATION ..............................................242
8.6.1 Installation by replacing the Micro memory card already programmed ............................................242
8.6.2 Installation by IDE Siemens Simatic Step 7 v5.4..............................................................................242
9 APPENDIX A – REMOTE GUI INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................247
9.1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................248
9.2 INSTALLATION STEPS ........................................................................................................................249
9.2.1 Package ............................................................................................................................................249
9.2.2 JRE installation .................................................................................................................................249
9.2.3 TH4RStart installation .......................................................................................................................250
9.2.4 Download of GUI software ................................................................................................................254
9.3 UNINSTALLATION ...............................................................................................................................255
9.3.1 TH4RStart .........................................................................................................................................255
9.3.2 Uninstallation of downloaded GUIs...................................................................................................256
10 APPENDIX B – CONFIGURATION MENU FOR SOFTWARE VERSIONS PREVIOUS W30 ...............257
10.1 CONFIGURATION MENU FUNCTIONS ..............................................................................................258
10.2 CONFIGURATION MENU ACCESS.....................................................................................................259
10.3 CONFIGURATION MENU NAVIGATION AND USAGE .......................................................................259
10.3.1 Main menu ....................................................................................................................................260
10.3.2 Software installation & update ......................................................................................................261
10.3.3 Language installation & update ....................................................................................................263
10.3.4 Database installation & update .....................................................................................................265
10.3.5 Stations configuration ...................................................................................................................266
10.3.6 Touch screen calibration ...............................................................................................................266
10.3.7 Profibus card configuration ...........................................................................................................266
10.3.8 Authorization management ...........................................................................................................268
10.3.9 On line manuals/help installation & update ..................................................................................270
10.3.10 Data Backup .................................................................................................................................271
10.3.11 Archive management ....................................................................................................................274
10.3.12 Special operations ........................................................................................................................277
10.3.13 Exit ................................................................................................................................................278
11 APPENDIX C – CONFIGURATION MENU FOR SOFTWARE VERSION W36.1 ..................................279
11.1 CONFIGURATION MENU FUNCTIONS ..............................................................................................280
11.1.1 Special operations ........................................................................................................................280

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 8 / 280

TABLES
Table 1 - Thema4 HW components ........................................................................................................................16
Table 2 - Thema4 SW components ........................................................................................................................17
Table 3 - Thema4 HW installation steps.................................................................................................................21
Table 4 - Installation steps applicable for each PC ................................................................................................22
Table 5 - Recovery disk menu ..............................................................................................................................129
Table 6 - THEMA4 CONFIGURATION MENU (W30) ..........................................................................................158
Table 7 - Keyboard layout message .....................................................................................................................160
Table 8 - Configuration menu ...............................................................................................................................161
Table 9 – Set device .............................................................................................................................................162
Table 10 – Device related messages ...................................................................................................................163
Table 11 - Software complete update submenu ...................................................................................................164
Table 12 - Software objects update submenu ......................................................................................................165
Table 13 - Profibus card configuration submenu ..................................................................................................166
Table 14 – Manuals/help on line installation submenu ........................................................................................167
Table 15 – Hardware configuration submenu.......................................................................................................168
Table 16 - Printer Management submenu ............................................................................................................170
Table 17 - LCD Management submenu ...............................................................................................................171
Table 18 - Stations configuration default addresses ............................................................................................172
Table 19 - Stations configuration submenu ..........................................................................................................172
Table 20 - Stations configuration submenu elements description ........................................................................173
Table 21 - Example of setting primary IP address................................................................................................173
Table 22 - Example of setting remote IP addresses (part 1) ................................................................................173
Table 23 - Example of setting remote IP addresses (part 2) ................................................................................173
Table 24 - Example of setting subnet mask .........................................................................................................174
Table 25 - Example of setting gateway ................................................................................................................174
Table 26 - Authorization management submenu..................................................................................................175
Table 27 - Typing serial number ...........................................................................................................................175
Table 28 - Backup submenu .................................................................................................................................177
Table 29 - Backup submenu elements description...............................................................................................177
Table 30 - Performing the backup ........................................................................................................................178
Table 31 - Archive Management Reset submenu ................................................................................................179
Table 32 – Archive Management submenu elements description........................................................................179
Table 33 - Performing the reset ............................................................................................................................180
Table 34 - Performing login reset .........................................................................................................................180
Table 35 - Performing archives reset ...................................................................................................................181
Table 36 - Special operations submenu ...............................................................................................................182
Table 37 - Special parameters..............................................................................................................................182
Table 38 – Configure System Info Logging ..........................................................................................................183
Table 39 – PDF settings .......................................................................................................................................183
Table 40 – Documents upload ..............................................................................................................................183
Table 41 – Configure P/G debug log ....................................................................................................................185
Table 42 Units of measure: temperature unit .......................................................................................................185
Table 43 Units of misure: pressure unit ................................................................................................................185
Table 44 - Recovery disk 01a main menu ............................................................................................................191
Table 45 - Recovery disk 02a (or later) main menu .............................................................................................191
Table 46 - Software installation submenu ............................................................................................................192
Table 47 - Example of software installation (step 1) : PC primary side 1 or not primary side 2/3........................192
Table 48 - Example of software installation (step 2) : PC primary side 1 or not primary side 2/3........................192
Table 49 - Example of software installation (step 3) : PC primary side 1 or not primary side 2/3........................193
Table 50 - Example of software installation (step 4) ............................................................................................193
Table 51 - Example of software installation (step 5) ............................................................................................193
Table 52 - Example of software installation (step 6) ............................................................................................193
Table 53 - Example of software installation (step 7) ............................................................................................194
Table 54 - Example of software installation (step 8) : PC primary side 1 or not primary side 2/3........................194
Table 55 - Example of software installation (step 9) ............................................................................................194
Table 56 - Software installation media selection ..................................................................................................194
Table 57 - Software installation data errors ..........................................................................................................195
Table 58 - Example of software installation (step 10) ..........................................................................................196
Table 59 - Installation report (1)............................................................................................................................197
Table 60 - Installation report (2)............................................................................................................................197
Table 61 - Installation report (3)............................................................................................................................199

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 9 / 280

Table 62 - Installation report (4)............................................................................................................................199

Table 63 - Installation report (5)............................................................................................................................200
Table 64 - Installation report (6)............................................................................................................................201
Table 65 - Software update submenu ..................................................................................................................202
Table 66 - Authorization management submenu..................................................................................................203
Table 67 - Backup submenu .................................................................................................................................204
Table 68 - Archive management submenu...........................................................................................................205
Table 69 - System tuning submenu (up to version 03) .........................................................................................206
Table 70 - System tuning submenu (from version 04) .........................................................................................206
Table 71 - Changing watchdog parameter ...........................................................................................................206
Table 72 - Changing I/O task timeout parameter .................................................................................................207
Table 73 - Changing Door task timeout parameter ..............................................................................................207
Table 74 - Changing Esecutor task parameter .....................................................................................................207
Table 75 - Changing steam generator parameter ................................................................................................208
Table 76 - Changing debug log level ....................................................................................................................208
Table 77 - Saving parameter ................................................................................................................................208
Table 87 - Archives data categories .....................................................................................................................210
Table 79 - “Archive management” and “Move archive” categories ......................................................................215
Table 80 – Relation between folders and software components..........................................................................221
Table 81 - Example of disks to be extracted from CD ..........................................................................................223
Table 91 - Automatic selection of the USB device ...............................................................................................230
Table 92 - THEMA4 CONFIGURATION MENU (W28) ........................................................................................258
Table 84 - Keyboard layout message ...................................................................................................................259
Table 85 - Configuration menu .............................................................................................................................260
Table 86 - Software installation & update submenu .............................................................................................261
Table 87 - Software components installation submenu ........................................................................................261
Table 88 - Example of software components installation submenu .....................................................................261
Table 89 - PCS installation media selection .........................................................................................................262
Table 90 - Language installation & update submenu ...........................................................................................263
Table 91 - Language installation submenu...........................................................................................................263
Table 92 - Language installation media selection ................................................................................................264
Table 93 - Database installation & update submenu ............................................................................................265
Table 94 - Database installation & update media selection .................................................................................265
Table 95 - Touch screen calibration submenu .....................................................................................................266
Table 96 - Profibus card configuration submenu ..................................................................................................266
Table 97 - Profibus configuration install submenu................................................................................................266
Table 98 - Profibus configuration install media selection .....................................................................................267
Table 99 - Loading configuration into flash memory.............................................................................................267
Table 100 - Authorization management submenu ...............................................................................................268
Table 101 - Authorization management media selection .....................................................................................268
Table 102 - Typing serial number .........................................................................................................................269
Table 103 - Manuals installation submenu ...........................................................................................................270
Table 104 - Manuals installation media selection .................................................................................................270
Table 105 - Backup submenu ...............................................................................................................................271
Table 106 - Backup submenu elements description ............................................................................................271
Table 107 - Performing the backup ......................................................................................................................272
Table 108 - Selecting backup media ....................................................................................................................272
Table 109 - Backup media selection ....................................................................................................................273
Table 110 - Archive Management Reset submenu ..............................................................................................274
Table 111 - Archive Management Reset submenu elements description ............................................................274
Table 112 - Performing the reset ..........................................................................................................................275
Table 113 - Performing login reset .......................................................................................................................275
Table 114 - Performing archives reset .................................................................................................................276
Table 115 - Special operations submenu .............................................................................................................277
Table 116 - LCD Management submenu .............................................................................................................277
Table 117 - Special parameters ...........................................................................................................................278
Table 118 - Special operations submenu .............................................................................................................280
Table 119 - Special parameters ...........................................................................................................................280

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 10 / 280

FIGURES
Figure 1 - Thema4 system architecture ..................................................................................................................16
Figure 2 - Thema4 HW and SW architecture .........................................................................................................17
Figure 3 - Generic layout of the panel PC Pro-face PL692x-T4y ...........................................................................24
Figure 4 - Floppy disk drive PL-FD210 installation for Pro-face PL6920 (1/2) .......................................................25
Figure 5 - Floppy disk drive PL-FD210 installation for Pro-face PL6920 (2/2) .......................................................26
Figure 6 - Floppy disk drive PL-FD200 installation for Pro-face PL6921 ...............................................................27
Figure 7 – Hard disk drive PL-HD220 installation for Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y ...............................................28
Figure 8 – Step 1.3 - Remote I/O board installation into Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y ..........................................29
Figure 9 – RAM expansion installation for panel PC Proface PL692x-T4y (1/2) ...................................................30
Figure 10 – RAM expansion installation for panel PC Proface PL692x-T4y (2/2) .................................................31
Figure 11 - Layout of the left side of the panel PC Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70..........................................33
Figure 12 - Internal view of the Simatic Panel PC ..................................................................................................34
Figure 13 - RAM expansion installation for Siemens Industrial Lite70 ...................................................................35
Figure 14 - Layout of the panel PC Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D.......................................................36
Figure 15 - Layout of the panel PC Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E ..........................................................39
Figure 16 – Bottom view of the panel PC Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E .................................................40
Figure 17 - Layout of the blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B ..........................................................................................43
Figure 18 – Kit PSB-CD/FD01 (CD ROM/Floppy drive) installation in blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (1/2) ............44
Figure 19 – Kit PSB-CD/FD01 (CD ROM/Floppy drive) installation in blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (2/2) ............45
Figure 20 – Remote I/O board installation into blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (1/3)................................................46
Figure 21 – Remote I/O board installation into blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (2/3)................................................46
Figure 22 – Remote I/O board installation into blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (3/3)................................................47
Figure 23 – Panel PC 577 screen ..........................................................................................................................48
Figure 24 – Panel PC 577 connections ..................................................................................................................48
Figure 25 – I/O board installation into Siemens PC577 (1/2) .................................................................................49
Figure 26 – I/O board installation into Siemens PC577 (2/2) .................................................................................49
Figure 27 - Generic layout of the panel PC Pro-face PS3650A-T41 ......................................................................51
Figure 28 – Step 1.3 - Remote I/O board installation into Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41 .....................................52
Figure 29 – Panel PC Siemens Simatic IPC577C screen ......................................................................................54
Figure 30 – Panel PC Siemens Simatic IPC577C connections .............................................................................54
Figure 31 – I/O board installation into Siemens Simatic IPC577C .........................................................................55
Figure 32 – blind PC Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250 ..............................................56
Figure 33 – – blind PC Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250 connections .......................56
Figure 34 – I/O board installation into Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250 ....................58
Figure 35 – box PC B&R APC810 ..........................................................................................................................60
Figure 36 – Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F ..................................................................................................64
Figure 37 – I/O board installation into Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F .........................................................................65
Figure 38 – Battery replacement for Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F ...........................................................................66
Figure 39 - Power supply connection of Panel PC Proface ...................................................................................67
Figure 40 - Main voltage switch of Panel PC Siemens ..........................................................................................67
Figure 41 - Main voltage switch of Panel PC VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D ..............................................................68
Figure 42 - Main voltage switch of Blind PC, figure 1 .............................................................................................68
Figure 43 - Main voltage switch of Blind PC, figure 2 .............................................................................................69
Figure 44 - Main voltage switch of SIEMENS PC577 ............................................................................................69
Figure 45 – Power supply connection of PS3650A-T41 .........................................................................................70
Figure 46 – Power supply connection of VersaView 1500P Ser.E.........................................................................70
Figure 47 - Main voltage switch of Siemens Simatic IPC577C ..............................................................................71
Figure 48 - Main voltage switch of Blind PC APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250 .................................................72
Figure 49 - Main voltage switch of Box PC “B&R APC 810” & Automation Panel 900 ..........................................72
Figure 50 – Power supply connection of Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F .....................................................................73
Figure 51 - Profibus remote I/O board Applicom ....................................................................................................74
Figure 52 - Blackout connector ...............................................................................................................................75
Figure 53 - LCD serial connection ..........................................................................................................................76
Figure 54 – IPAQ-L/L+ wiring diagram .................................................................................................................136
Figure 55 – Generic Profibus network ..................................................................................................................137
Figure 56 – ET200M Profibus network example ..................................................................................................139
Figure 57 – ET200M bus address setting.............................................................................................................139
Figure 58 – ET200S Profibus network example ...................................................................................................140
Figure 59 – ET200S bus address setting .............................................................................................................140
Figure 60 – FlexI/O Profibus network example ....................................................................................................141
Figure 61 – FlexI/O Profibus extended network example ....................................................................................141

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 11 / 280

Figure 62 – FlexI/O bus address setting...............................................................................................................142

Figure 63 – PointI/O Profibus network example ...................................................................................................143
Figure 64 – PointI/O bus address setting .............................................................................................................143
Figure 65 – EX250 Profibus network example .....................................................................................................144
Figure 66 – EX250 bus address setting ...............................................................................................................144
Figure 67 – EX500 Profibus network example .....................................................................................................145
Figure 68 – EX500 bus address setting ...............................................................................................................146
Figure 69 – DP/DP Coupler example ...................................................................................................................147
Figure 70 – DP/DP Coupler address setting ........................................................................................................147
Figure 71 – Load program procedure: Documents Loaded .................................................................................184
Figure 72 – Load program procedure: Documents to Load .................................................................................184
Figure 73 – Recovery disk startup page ...............................................................................................................189
Figure 74 – Move archives submenu ...................................................................................................................209
Figure 75 – Move archives submenu ...................................................................................................................210
Figure 76 – Changing focused window ................................................................................................................211
Figure 77 – View explicit date and time ................................................................................................................211
Figure 78 – Multiple selections .............................................................................................................................212
Figure 79 – File transfer........................................................................................................................................213
Figure 80 – Data reloaded ....................................................................................................................................213
Figure 81 – Software CD Fac-simile .....................................................................................................................219
Figure 82 – Generic CD internal structure ............................................................................................................220
Figure 83 – Thema4 to Host direct connection.....................................................................................................226
Figure 84 – Thema4 to Host HUB connection ......................................................................................................226
Figure 85 – Checking default java version ...........................................................................................................249
Figure 86 – Checking a specific java version, which is installed ..........................................................................249
Figure 87 – Checking a specific java version, which is not installed ....................................................................250
Figure 88 – Launching directly a non default java version ...................................................................................250
Figure 89 – TH4RStart software package ............................................................................................................250
Figure 90 – TH4RStart installation, step 1............................................................................................................251
Figure 91 – TH4RStart installation, step 2............................................................................................................251
Figure 92 – TH4RStart installation, step 3............................................................................................................252
Figure 93 – TH4RStart installation, step 4............................................................................................................252
Figure 94 – TH4RStart installation, step 5............................................................................................................253
Figure 95 – TH4RStart installation, step 6............................................................................................................253
Figure 96 – TH4RStart installation, step 7............................................................................................................254
Figure 97 – TH4RStart uninstallation from Control Panel ....................................................................................255
Figure 98 – Confirmation of TH4RStart uninstallation ..........................................................................................255
Figure 99 – Uninstallation complete .....................................................................................................................256
Figure 100 – Manuals/help on line installation submenu .....................................................................................270

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual Page 12 / 280

This page is left intentionally blank

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 1 Page 13 / 280

Section 1 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

1 PREFACE
1.1 - INTRODUCTION
1.2 - NOTATIONS

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 1 Page 14 / 280

1.1 INTRODUCTION
The scope of this document is to provide all the information for the setup and configuration of the “THEMA4”
control system's hardware and software.

The three main operations, regarding “Thema4 Software Installation and configuration”, are:
1. System setup procedure and SW installation
2. Software upgrade
3. Data management

1.2 NOTATIONS
In this manual, these notations are used:

NOTE
for additional note

REFERENCE
for references to other sections

IMPORTANT NOTE
for important note

WARNING!!
for very important note

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 2 Page 15 / 280

Section 2 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

2 CONTROL SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

2.1 - HARDWARE COMPONENTS
2.2 - SOFTWARE COMPONENTS
2.3 - GUI REMOTE SOFTWARE

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 2 Page 16 / 280

2.1 HARDWARE COMPONENTS

THEMA4 HW components
1 Side 1 Operator Panel (S1, primary)
2 Side 2/3 Operator Panels (S2, secondary / S3, technical area) ; Message LCD display for side two (if no
Panel-PC at side 2)
3 PLC Remote I/O modules
4 HUB for Ethernet connection between operator panels and external systems.
5 UPS for blackout management
6 Thermal Printer
7 Side 1/ 2 door management modules
8 Remote operator station
Table 1 - Thema4 HW components

These 8 main parts are mutually connected as shown schematically in the layout below:

STERILIZER
6 5

Thermal printer UPS

2
Panel PC
Side 2
Field bus 1
Panel PC
BUS Side 1 Panel PC
card
Technical
Area
3 Operator panel 1
PWR BUS D D AN AN Operator panels 2/3
IN OUT IN OUT

4-20mA/Pt100
7 4
converter

FIELD: Devices of the

sterilizer (sensors and
actuators) Ethernet HUB
PLC remote I/O modules Door module

Ethernet connection
(DDE,DDL,OPC,Modbus
Ethernet) to external systems
8 (SCADA DCS, Recorder)

WINDOWS Serial line connection

PC Printer (Modbus) to external systems
(WINDOWS) (SCADA, DCS)
Remote operator station

Figure 1 - Thema4 system architecture

REFERENCE
For more details on the system's hardware architecture see document “Thema4 Control System
USER'S MANUAL (D/O#176574)”

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 2 Page 17 / 280

2.2 SOFTWARE COMPONENTS

THEMA4 SW components OS/DRIVER SW I/O
GUI / I/O I/O
VxWorks Windows Boot DATA
PCS FECP JWO FW Conv. Conf.
RTOS OS ROM FILES
RKS FILES FILES
1 Operator panel S1 X X X X X X X
2a Operator panels S2/S3 X X X
2b Message LCD display X
3 PLC Remote I/O modules X
4 HUB for Ethernet connection
5 UPS for blackout management
6 Thermal printer X
7 Side 1/ 2 doors management
modules
8 Remote operator station X X
Table 2 - Thema4 SW components
REFERENCE
For more details on SW categories see document “Thema4 Control System Configuration Manual
(D/O #86727)".

4-20/Pt100
Converter BUS board
I/O config. R.T.O.S
config. file +
file
bootrom

STERILIZER Thermal
printer
2
Panel PC
L2
1
3 Field bus
Panel PC
PW BUS D D AN AN BUS L1 Panel PC
R IN OUT IN OUT board HUB L3

4-20mA/Pt100
converter

Connection to external
systems

8
Log data WINDOWS
PC
PCS FECP GUI
Kernel SRVR +
P/G Lib JWORKS
Conf. data

DATA AND FILE

ARCHIVE
Remote station

Figure 2 - Thema4 HW and SW architecture

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 2 Page 18 / 280

2.3 GUI REMOTE SOFTWARE

REFERENCE
See document “User Manual" for information about usage and Appendix A of this document for
information about installation.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 19 / 280

Section 3 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

3 THEMA4 HARDWARE SETUP

3.1 - HARDWARE SETUP PROCEDURE
3.2 - STEP 1 – PANEL PC INSTALLATION
3.2.1 - Panel PC “Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y”
3.2.2 - Panel PC “Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70”
3.2.3 - Panel PC “Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P”
Ser.A-D
3.2.4 - Panel PC “Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P”
Ser.E
3.2.5 - Blind PC “Pro-face PS-2000B”
3.2.6 - Panel PC “Siemens PC 577”
3.2.7 - Panel PC “Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41”
3.2.8 - Panel PC “Siemens Simatic IPC577C”
3.2.9 - Blind PC “Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-
CD2G-2P-1G-NO250”
3.2.10 - Box PC “B&R APC 810” + Automation Panel
900
3.3 - STEP 2 – CONNECTION OF POWER SUPPLY TO
PC AND UPS
3.3.1- Pro-face PL692x-T4y power supply
3.3.2 - Siemens Industrial Lite 70 power supply
3.3.3 - Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D power
supply
3.3.4 - Blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B power supply
3.3.5- Siemens PC577 power supply
3.3.6 - Pro-face PS3650A-T41 power supply
3.3.7 - Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E power
supply
3.3.8 - Siemens Simatic IPC577C power supply
3.3.9 - Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-
1G-NO250
3.3.10 - Box PC “B&R APC 810” + Automation Panel
900
3.3.11 - Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 20 / 280

3.3.11 - Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

A grounded three-prong IEC320 power cord provides power to the computer. The
power supply input accepts 100...240V AC and is autoranging.

IMPORTANT NOTE
If using an alternate IEC 320 cord, make sure the female end of the
cord is sized appropriately for the retention clip.

For these steps to connect AC power to performance and non display computers.
1. Connect the power cord to the AC power input
2. Secure the power cord in lace with the retention clip.

Figure 50 – Power supply connection of Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

3. Apply 100...240V AC power to the computer.

STEP3 – CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O BOARD

3.4.1 - Profibus connection by means of a D-SUB 9-pin
connector.
3.4.2 - Blackout signal connection.
3.5 - STEP4 – RS232 CONNECTION FOR DOOR SIDE 2
MESSAGE DISPLAY
3.6 - STEP5 – RS232 CONNECTION FOR MODBUS
COMMUNICATION (if present)
3.7 - STEP6 – ETHERNET PORT NETWORK
CONNECTION TO HUB (if present)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 21 / 280

3.1 HARDWARE SETUP PROCEDURE

The Hardware setup procedure is composed of the following main steps:

STEP 1 Panel / blind PC installation

Step 1.1 Floppy disk drive installation
Step 1.2 Hard disk drive installation
Step 1.3 Remote I/O board installation
Step 1.4 RAM expansion installation
Step 1.5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management
Step 1.6 BIOS battery replacement
STEP 2 Connection of the power supply to Panel PC and UPS.
STEP 3 Connections of the Remote I/O board to the Profibus connector (to be wired to the
PLC I/O Profibus adaptor) and to the Blackout/Shutdown connector.
STEP 4 RS232 connection for Door side 2 message display (if door side 2 is present).
STEP 5 RS232 connection for Modbus communication (if present).
STEP 6 Ethernet port network connection to HUB (if present).
Table 3 - Thema4 HW installation steps

Follows the list of industrial PCs (panel or blind) used in the Thema4 control system, with the list of installation
steps that is applicable for each PC:

PC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70

B&R APC 810 + Automation Panel

Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P

Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P

Digital Pro-face APL3000-BA-

Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41
Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y

Digital Pro-face PS-2000B

Siemens Simatic IPC577C

(6AG7010-0AA00-0AA0)

Model

CD2G-2P-1G-NO250
Siemens PC577
Panel PC

Panel PC

Panel PC

Panel PC

Panel PC

Panel PC

Panel PC
Blind PC

Blind PC
Ser.A-D

Box PC
Ser.E

900
STEP 1 1.1 Yes No No Yes No No No No No No
1.2 Yes No No No No No No No No No
1.3 Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
1.4 Yes Yes No No No No No No No No
1.5 No Yes No No No No No No No No
1.6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
STEP 2 Yes
STEP 3 only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
STEP 4 Yes
STEP 5 Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No
STEP 6 Yes

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 22 / 280

PC 11

Model Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P

Panel PC

Ser.E

STEP 1 1.1 No
1.2 No
1.3 Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
1.4 No
1.5 No
1.6 Yes
STEP 2 Yes
STEP 3 nly for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
STEP 4 Yes
STEP 5 Yes
STEP 6 Yes
Table 4 - Installation steps applicable for each PC

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 23 / 280

3.2 STEP 1 – PANEL PC INSTALLATION

WARNING!!
Observe the following before opening the device.
 Disconnect the Panel PC from the power supply before plugging in or unplugging
any modules or extension components.
 Before plugging in the connection cables, the static charge of your body, the Panel
PC and the connecting cables must be brought to the same level. To do this, briefly
touch the metal housing.
 Discharge the electrostatic charge from tools you are using.
 Wear a grounding strap when handling components.
 Leave modules and extension components in their packaging until they are to be
installed.
 Modules and extension components should only be held at the edges; never touch
connection pins and strip conductors.
 Never operate the Panel PC with the cover open.

NOTE
-The panel PCs can be mounted, both on side 1 and side 2 (optional) of the sterilizer.
-The blind PC is normally installed into the cabinet, in the technical area of the sterilizer.

NOTE
Step 1.4 - Panel PC Allen-Bradley VersaView and Siemens panel PC577 can manage RAM equal
or greater than 256MB.

NOTE
The CD-ROM device present on the Siemens Panel PC and the DVD-ROM device present on Allen
Bradley Panel PC, are not managed by the operating system used in Thema4.

Follows the layouts of the industrial PCs (panel or blind) used in the Thema4 control system.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 24 / 280

3.2.1 Panel PC “Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y”

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for Panel PC Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y Applicable

Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation Yes
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation Yes
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation Yes
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.1.1 Panel PC layout

The following figure shows the Generic layout of the Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y Panel PC, where :
- C = front maintenance cover, to access to floppy disk drive FDD (D) and keyboard connector (E).
- O = front mount FDD slot – FDD is inserted at the back side (only on PL6920).
- U = side mount FDD slot (only on PL6921).
- W = HDD (hard disk unit) expansion slot.
- V = expansion slot for I/O board.
- P = power terminal.
- Y = power switch.
- I, J, K = RS232C connectors to COM1, COM2, COM3.
- T = network connector.

Figure 3 - Generic layout of the panel PC Pro-face PL692x-T4y

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 25 / 280

3.2.1.2 Step 1.1 – Floppy disk installation on Pro-face PL692x-T4y

Follows the installation of FDDs PL-FD210 and PL-FD200 respectively for PL6920 and PL6921.

PL-FD210 installation on PL6920 :

Figure 4 - Floppy disk drive PL-FD210 installation for Pro-face PL6920 (1/2)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 26 / 280

Figure 5 - Floppy disk drive PL-FD210 installation for Pro-face PL6920 (2/2)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 27 / 280

PL-FD200 installation on PL6921 :

Figure 6 - Floppy disk drive PL-FD200 installation for Pro-face PL6921

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 28 / 280

3.2.1.3 Step 1.2 - Hard disk kit PL-HD220 installation in panel PC Proface PL692x-T4y

 The hard disk must be installed in slot HDD0.

 The Master/Slave jumper must be removed.

Figure 7 – Hard disk drive PL-HD220 installation for Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 29 / 280

3.2.1.4 Step 1.3 - Remote I/O board installation into Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y

Figure 8 – Step 1.3 - Remote I/O board installation into Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 30 / 280

3.2.1.5 Step 1.4 - RAM expansion installation for panel PC Proface PL692x-T4y
The RAM expansion KIT available is:

Size Model
128MB PC-133 PL-EM128 Samsung K4S281632I –UC75

Figure 9 – RAM expansion installation for panel PC Proface PL692x-T4y (1/2)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 31 / 280

Figure 10 – RAM expansion installation for panel PC Proface PL692x-T4y (2/2)

WARNING!!
To prevent an electric shock or PL unit damage, confirm that the PL unit’s power switch has
been turned OFF before installing the DIM module.
Since DIM module sockets are fragile and can break easily, be sure to install the DIM module
carefully.
Since static electricity can damage sensitive electronics parts, be careful when installing a
DIM module.
To prevent damage from static electricity, be sure to wear a wristband, or similar static
protection device when installing the memory modules. If no wristband is available, please
touch the PL unit’s metal chassis prior to installing the module to stabilize your body’s
electrical potential.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 32 / 280

3.2.1.6 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for panel PC Proface PL692x-T4y
The device is equipped with a internal battery that maintain the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The life spam
of backup battery is approximately 10 years. The battery is located on the motherboard in a holder and can be
replaced without the need of any tools. If the settings in the System Time and System Date fields are frequently
wrong when you power up the computer, the battery is dead and it’s necessary to replace the battery. The
internal battery may be replaced only with an identical battery or with a type recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not throw the batteries into the household waste, but they must be disposed of in accordance with local
regulations concerning special waste.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 33 / 280

3.2.2 Panel PC “Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70”

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:
Installation steps for Panel PC “Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70” Applicable
Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation No
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation Yes
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management Yes
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.2.1 Panel PC layout

For the panel PC Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70, it is necessary to exchange the IDE connectors to set the
HARD DISK as PRIMARY MASTER.
The following figure shows the layout of the left side of the Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70 Panel PC,
where :
- Keyboard = PS/2 connector.
- FDD = floppy disk drive.
- Expansion slots = free slots for installation of I/O board.
- LPT1 = parallel port for printer connection.
- COM1 = serial port.
- Ethernet = network connector.
- Soft-Power button = system reset.

Figure 11 - Layout of the left side of the panel PC Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 34 / 280

3.2.2.2 Step 1.3 – Remote I/O board installation into panel PC Siemens IL 70
To access to the expansion slots, loosen up the screws on the rear panel of the housing and open it.
The upper 3 expansion slots (complying AT/PCI) can be used for the installation of the I/O board.

Figure 12 - Internal view of the Simatic Panel PC

NOTE
Before beginning the installation of the software, it is necessary to check IDE connections of hard
drive and CD-ROM that must be respectively: the hard disk on the primary IDE and the CD-ROM
on the secondary IDE. If this situation is not verified, exchange the two connectors.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 35 / 280

3.2.2.3 Step 1.4 - RAM expansion installation for Siemens Industrial Lite70
Some models of panel PC have only 128MB of internal RAM. It is necessary to verify the RAM size installed on
the mother board of the panel PC. If the RAM size is 128MB, it is possible to expand the RAM to 256MB, by
exchanging it with the “RAM expansion KIT“.

Size Model
256MB PC2700 Kingston TECHNOLOGY KVR333X64C25/256

Figure 13 - RAM expansion installation for Siemens Industrial Lite70

WARNING!!
To prevent an electric shock or IL70 unit damage, confirm that the IL70 unit’s power switch
has been turned OFF before installing the DIM module.
Since DIM module sockets are fragile and can break easily, be sure to install the DIM module
carefully.
Since static electricity can damage sensitive electronics parts, be careful when installing a
DIM module.
To prevent damage from static electricity, be sure to wear a wristband, or similar static
protection device when installing the memory modules. If no wristband is available, please
touch the IL70 unit’s metal chassis prior to installing the module to stabilize your body’s
electrical potential.

3.2.2.4 Step 1.5 - O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management
The software upgrade allows the RAM size management of 256MB:
O.S./D Reference
S11 or next See THEMA4 Configuration Manual

REFERENCE
See document “Thema4 Control System Configuration Manual” (D/O #86727).

3.2.2.5 Step 1.6 – Battery replacement for Siemens Panel PC IL70

The device is equipped with a Lithium battery that maintain the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The life spam
of backup battery is approximately 3-5 years, depending on the operation condition. The battery is located on the
motherboard in a holder and can be replaced without the need of any tools. If the settings in the System Time
and System Date fields are frequently wrong when you power up the computer, the lithium battery is dead and
it’s necessary to replace the battery. The lithium battery may be replaced only with an identical battery or with a
type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not throw the lithium batteries into the household waste, but they
must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.
WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 36 / 280

3.2.3 Panel PC “Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P” Ser.A-D

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for Panel PC “Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P” Ser.A-D Applicable
Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation No
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation No
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.3.1 Panel PC layout

For the panel PC Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D, it is necessary to exchange the IDE connectors to
set the HARD DISK as PRIMARY MASTER.
The following figure shows the generic layout of panel PC Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D, where :
- A = Slim Floppy Drive
- B = Slim CD-ROM or CD/DVD-RW Drive
- C = Keyboard/Mouse Port (PS/2)
- D = Audio Port
- E = 2 USB Ports
- F = 10/100 M Ethernet Port
- G = 3 Serial Ports (4 for non-touch)
- H = PCI Slot (half length)
- I = 2 Parallel Ports
- J = Compact Flash Slot
- K = VESA Mount

Figure 14 - Layout of the panel PC Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 37 / 280

3.2.3.2 Step 1.3 – Remote I/O board installation into panel PC Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D
For the installation of the Profibus board, execute the following steps:
1. Disconnect power from the computer
2. Remove back cover (9 screws). Set screws aside for replacing back cover:

3. Remove Slot Cover Bracket (2 screws):

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 38 / 280
4. Insert board in the PCI slot:

5. Fan adapter positioning

NOTE
For Panel PC Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.B or following, the “fan adapter” must not be
removed, to avoid processor overheating problems.

3.2.3.3 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for panel PC Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P SerA-D
The device is equipped with a internal battery that maintains the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The battery
life is dependent on the amount of on-time per week. Estimated life of the battery is listed below:

ON-TIME EXPECTED BATTERY LIFE

0 hours/week 4 years
40 hours/week 5.5 years
80 hours/week 7 years
The battery is located on the motherboard in a holder and can be replaced without the need of any tools. If the
settings in the System Time and System Date fields are frequently wrong when you power up the computer, the
battery is dead and it’s necessary to replace the battery. The battery can be replaced with part number CR2032
from one of the following manufacturers: Panasonic, Sony, Toshiba, Sanyo, Duracell. Eveready, FDK, Hitachi,
Mitsubishi, Radio Shack, Renata SA, Varta Geratevatterie.
Do not throw the lithium batteries into the household waste, but they must be disposed of in accordance with
local regulations concerning special waste.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 39 / 280

3.2.4 Panel PC “Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P” Ser.E

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for Panel PC “Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P” Ser.E Applicable
Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation No
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation No
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.4.1 Panel PC layout

The following figures shows the generic layout of panel PC Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E:

Figure 15 - Layout of the panel PC Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 40 / 280

Note: The Ethernet port

to be used (highlighted
in the picture above) is
the one nearer to the
parallel port.

Figure 16 – Bottom view of the panel PC Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 41 / 280

3.2.4.2 Step 1.3 – Remote I/O board installation into panel PC Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E
For the installation of the Profibus board, execute the following steps:
1. Disconnect power from the computer
2. Remove the rear cover:

3. Remove the Slot Cover and store it in a safe place:

4. Insert board in the PCI slot:

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 42 / 280
5. Reinstall the cover

3.2.4.3 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for panel PC Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E
The device is equipped with a internal battery that maintains the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The battery
life is dependent on the amount of on-time per week. Estimated life of the battery is listed below:

ON-TIME EXPECTED BATTERY LIFE

0 hours/week 4 years
40 hours/week 5.5 years
80 hours/week 7 years

If the settings in the System Time and System Date fields are frequently wrong when you power up the
computer, the battery is dead and it’s necessary to replace the battery. The battery can be replaced with part
number CR2032 from one of the following manufacturers: Panasonic, Sony, Toshiba, Sanyo, Duracell,
Eveready, FDK, Hitachi, Mitsubishi, Radio Shack, Renata SA, Varta Geratevatterie.
Do not throw the lithium batteries into the household waste, but they must be disposed of in accordance with
local regulations concerning special waste.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure to
insert the battery the right way round.

The battery is located on the motherboard in a holder and can be replaced without the need of any tools. To
replace battery unplug power from computer, remove the rear cover, extract the exhaust battery moving aside
the battery latch and plug in a new one. After system reboot remember to set time and date.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 43 / 280

3.2.5 Blind PC “Pro-face PS-2000B”

The applicable steps of blind PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for Blind PC “Pro-face PS-2000B” Applicable

Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation Yes
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation No
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.5.1 Blind PC layout

The following figure shows the Generic layout of the Pro-face PS-2000B Blind PC, where :
- 16 = expansion slot for I/O board.
- 2 = power terminal.
- 1 = power switch.
- 12-15 = RS232C connectors to COM1, COM2, COM3.
- 20 = network connector.

Figure 17 - Layout of the blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 44 / 280

WARNING!!
For the blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B with OS/D configuration software B1 only, a PS/2
mouse must be connected to its plug even if it won’t be used.

3.2.5.2 Step 1.1 – Floppy disk drive and CD drive kit PSB-CD/FD01 installation

Figure 18 – Kit PSB-CD/FD01 (CD ROM/Floppy drive) installation in blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (1/2)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 45 / 280

Figure 19 – Kit PSB-CD/FD01 (CD ROM/Floppy drive) installation in blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (2/2)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 46 / 280

3.2.5.3 Step 1.3 – Remote I/O board installation into blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B

For the installation of the Profibus board, execute the following steps:

1. Remove cover (4 screws):

Figure 20 – Remote I/O board installation into blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (1/3)

The following picture shows the internal of the Panel PC:

Figure 21 – Remote I/O board installation into blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (2/3)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 47 / 280

2. Remove the slot cover and insert the card into the first PCI slot. Fasten the screw and the
expansion board Stay.

Figure 22 – Remote I/O board installation into blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B (3/3)

3. Close the cover and fasten screws.

3.2.5.4 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B
The device is equipped with a internal battery that maintain the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The life spam
of backup battery is approximately 10 years, depending on the operation condition. The battery is located on the
motherboard in a holder and can be replaced without the need of any tools. If the settings in the System Time
and System Date fields are frequently wrong when you power up the computer, the lithium battery is dead and
it’s necessary to replace the battery. The battery may be replaced only with an identical battery or with a type
recommended by the manufacturer. Do not throw the batteries into the household waste, but they must be
disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 48 / 280

3.2.6 Panel PC “Siemens PC 577”

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for Panel PC “Siemens PC 577” Applicable

Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation No
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation No
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.6.1 Panel PC layout

The device serves as a base for PC-based HMI devices, the Panel PCs. The Panel PC 577 fulfills the basic
requirements for industrial compatibility and provides high performance at a low price. The device consists of the
control unit with a key or touch panel and the computer unit. The control unit is on the back of the computer unit.

Figure 23 – Panel PC 577 screen

1 KEYBOARD Connection for a PS/2 keyboard

2 MOUSE Connection for a PS/2 mouse
3 USB 2.0 Connection for USB devices
4 COM 1 Serial interface, 9-pin Sub-D connector
5 LYP1 Parallel interface, 25-pin sub D Socket
6 VGA VGA connection
7 USB 2.0 Connection for USB devices
8 Ethernet RJ 45 Ethernet connection 10/100/1000 Mbps

Figure 24 – Panel PC 577 connections

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 49 / 280

3.2.6.2 Step 1.3 – I/O board installation into Siemens PC577

To access to the expansion slots, loosen up the screws on the rear panel of the housing and open it. The upper
3 expansion slots (complying AT/PCI) can be used for the installation of the I/O board.

Remove the upper four screws (1) and the lower two screws (2). Then lift the lid up and remove it.

Figure 25 – I/O board installation into Siemens PC577 (1/2)

Unscrew and remove the relevant steel slot cover (1) and insert the I/O board into the relevant expansion slot(2).

Figure 26 – I/O board installation into Siemens PC577 (2/2)

Then fix the board at the external slot with the screw (1) and close and refix the lid.

3.2.6.3 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for panel PC Siemens PC577
The device is equipped with a lithium battery that maintain the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The life spam
of backup battery is approximately 3-5 years, depending on the operation condition. The battery is located on the
motherboard in a holder and can be replaced without the need of any tools. If the settings in the System Time
and System Date fields are frequently wrong when you power up the computer, the lithium battery is dead and
it’s necessary to replace the battery. The lithium battery may be replaced only with an identical battery or with a
type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not throw the batteries into the household waste, but they must be
disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 50 / 280

3.2.7 Panel PC “Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41”

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for Panel PC “Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41” Applicable

Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation No
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation No
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.7.1 Panel PC layout

The following figure shows the Generic layout of the Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41 Panel PC, where :
- C = front cover, to access USB connector.
- L = expansion slot for I/O board.
- G = power terminal.
- F = power switch.
- U = RS232C connector to COM1.
- R = network connector (LAN1).

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 51 / 280

Figure 27 - Generic layout of the panel PC Pro-face PS3650A-T41

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 52 / 280

3.2.7.2 Step 1.3 - Remote I/O board installation into Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41

Figure 28 – Step 1.3 - Remote I/O board installation into Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 53 / 280

3.2.7.3 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41
The device is equipped with a lithium battery that maintain the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The life spam
of backup battery is approximately 5 years, depending on the operation condition. The battery is located on the
motherboard in a holder and can be replaced without the need of any tools. If the settings in the System Time
and System Date fields are frequently wrong when you power up the computer, the lithium battery is dead and
it’s necessary to replace the battery. The lithium battery may be replaced only with an identical battery or with a
type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not throw the batteries into the household waste, but they must be
disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 54 / 280

3.2.8 Panel PC “Siemens Simatic IPC577C”

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for Panel PC “Siemens Simatic IPC577C” Applicable

Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation No
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation No
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.8.1 Panel PC layout

The device serves as a base for PC-based HMI devices, the Panel PCs. The Panel PC Siemens Simatic
IPC577C fulfills the basic requirements for industrial compatibility and provides high performance at a low price.
The device consists of the control unit with a key or touch panel and the computer unit. The control unit is on the
back of the computer unit.

Figure 29 – Panel PC Siemens Simatic IPC577C screen

1 COM 1 Serial port 1 (RS232), 9-pin Cannon socket

2 ETHERNET 2 RJ45 Ethernet connections for 10/100/1000 Mbps
3 USB 4 x USB 2.0 / 500 mA connections
4 DVI DVI-I socket
5 240 VAC Power supply connection
Figure 30 – Panel PC Siemens Simatic IPC577C connections

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 55 / 280

3.2.8.2 Step 1.3 – I/O board installation into Siemens Simatic IPC577C
To access to the expansion slot, loosen up the screws on the rear panel of the housing and open it. The PCI slot
(4) can be used for the installation of the I/O board. Then, fix the board to the external slot with the screw, close
and refix the lid.

1 SSD or Hard disk

2 Backup battery
3 Motherboard
4 Slot for PCI card
5 Slot for memory module
Figure 31 – I/O board installation into Siemens Simatic IPC577C

3.2.8.3 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for Siemens Simatic IPC577C
The device is equipped with a lithium battery that maintain the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The life spam
of backup battery is approximately 5-8 years, depending on the operation condition. The battery is located on the
motherboard in a holder and can be replaced without the need of any tools. If the settings in the System Time
and System Date fields are frequently wrong when you power up the computer, the lithium battery is dead and
it’s necessary to replace the battery. The lithium battery may be replaced only with an identical battery or with a
type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not throw the batteries into the household waste, but they must be
disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 56 / 280

3.2.9 Blind PC “Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250”

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for blind PC “Digital Pro-face Proface APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G- Applicable

NO250”
Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation No
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation No
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.9.1 blind PC layout

The following figure shows the Generic layout of blind PC Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-
NO250.

Figure 32 – blind PC Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250

Figure 33 – – blind PC Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250 connections

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 57 / 280
A Hardware reset switch (RESET) Restarts the PL unit during normal operation
status.
In the Soft OFF status, resets the unit to the normal
operation status.
B DVI-I interface (DVI-I) Interface with DVI monitor or analog RGB
monitor
C Ethernet interface (LAN1) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Auto
Changeover. This interface uses an RJ-45 type
modular jack connector (8 pins).
D Ethernet interface (LAN2) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Auto Changeover. This
interface uses an RJ-45 type modular jack
connector (8 pins).
E Expansion slot For expansion board (PCI).
F Expansion slot cover Expansion slot cover is removed when mounting
expansion board and DIM module
G HDD slot For serial ATA HDD unit. HDD slot 0 and then
HDD slot 1 from the bottom
H USB interface 4 ports, USB 2.0 compatible.
I Speaker output interface (SPK) Mini pin jack connector
J HDD status lamp (HDD0/HDD1) From bottom in diagram: the status lamp for HDD
slot 0 and one for HDD slot 1
- GREEN (lit): HDD mounted (normal operation
- No lit: No HDD mounted
K Power LED / RAS status lamp Power LED / RAS status lamp (POWER)
(POWER) - GREEN (lit): Normal operation (power is on)
- Green (blinking): soft OFF state
- Orange (lit): System monitor error (RAS error)
- No lit: Power is OFF
L Disk access lamp (DISK) - Green (lit): When HDD or IDE is accessed
- No lit: when neither HDD nor IDE is accessed
M Serial interface (COM1) D-sub 9-pin plug type
RS-232C, RS-422, RS-485 Changeover.
CI(RI)/+5V Changeover
N Serial interface (COM2) D-sub 9-pin plug type
RS-232C, RS-422, RS-485 Changeover.
CI(RI)/+5V Changeover
O Serial interface (COM3/COM4) D-sub 9-pin plug type
RS-232C, RS-422, RS-485 Changeover.
CI(RI)/+5V Changeover
P RAS interface (RAS) D-sub 9-pin socket type
Q CF Card interface IDE-type connection
CF Card compatible is available

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 58 / 280

3.2.9.2 Step 1.3 – I/O board installation into Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250
To install the I/O board remove the the screws from the expansion slot cover.

Open the cover and insert the I/O board in the PCI slot.

Figure 34 – I/O board installation into Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 59 / 280

3.2.9.3 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-
NO250
The device is equipped with a lithium battery that maintain the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The
life spam of backup battery is approximately 5 years, depending on the operation condition.
With the PL-3000B series unit, remove the switch cover to operate the internal switches or replace the
batteries for clock data backup. Unscrew the attachment screw securing the switch cover, and remove
the cover. For the PL-3000B series unit, install the switch cover back on the control box after completing
the switch operation or the battery replacement. The torque should be 0.5 to 0.6 N•m.

When the battery is replaced, the BIOS settings are initalized. Configure the BIOS settings again after
replacing the battery.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 60 / 280

3.2.10 Box PC “B&R APC 810” + Automation Panel 900

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for box PC “B&R APC 810” Applicable

Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation No
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation No
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.10.1 Box PC layout

The following figure shows the Generic layout of box PC B&R APC 810.

Figure 35 – box PC B&R APC810

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 61 / 280

3.2.10.2 Step 1.3 – I/O board installation into B&R APC 810
To install the I/O board remove the screws from the slot cover.

Figure 36 – I/O board installation into B&R APC 810

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 62 / 280

3.2.10.3 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for B&R APC 810
The device is equipped with a lithium battery that maintain the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The
life spam of backup battery is approximately 5 years, depending on the operation condition.

Figure 37 – Battery replacement for B&R APC 810

When the battery is replaced, the BIOS settings are initialized. Configure the BIOS settings again after
replacing the battery.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 63 / 280

3.2.11 Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

The applicable steps of panel PC installation are detailed in the following paragraphs:

Installation steps for Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500p Ser.F” Applicable

Step 1 Floppy disk drive installation No
Step 2 Hard disk drive installation No
Step 3 Remote I/O board installation Yes (*)
Step 4 RAM expansion installation No
Step 5 O.S./D (Operating System/Drivers) upgrade for RAM 256MB management No
Step 6 BIOS battery replacement Yes (**)
(*) Yes, but only for Panel/Blind PC mounted on side 1
(**) if necessary

3.2.11.1 Panel PC layout

The following figure shows the Generic layout of Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F.

IMPORTANT NOTE
USB port on the front (3) is not managed because not supported by RTOS version 5.5.1.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 64 / 280

Figure 36 – Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 65 / 280

3.2.11.2 Step 1.3 – I/O board installation into Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

Remove the screws like in picture below.

The Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F has a PCIe slot instead PCIe adapter has to be installed on
standard PCI slot: to install applicomIO board is necessary to install metallic support here shown.
PCIe adapter here shown.

Figure 37 – I/O board installation into Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 66 / 280

3.2.11.3 Step 1.6 – BIOS battery replacement for Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F
The device is equipped with a lithium battery that maintain the CMOS setting and real time-clock. The
life spam of backup battery is approximately 5 years, depending on the operation condition.

Figure 38 – Battery replacement for Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

When the battery is replaced, the BIOS settings are initialized. Configure the BIOS settings again after
replacing the battery.

WARNING!!
Incorrect replacement of the internal battery may lead to a risk of explosion! Make sure that
you insert the battery the right way round.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 67 / 280

3.3 STEP 2 – CONNECTION OF POWER SUPPLY TO PC AND UPS

3.3.1 Pro-face PL692x-T4y power supply

Figure 39 - Power supply connection of Panel PC Proface

3.3.2 Siemens Industrial Lite 70 power supply

The Panel PC can be operated on 120/230 VAC power supplies using the power cable provided. The power
supply is provided at the panel backside with a manual mains voltage switch-over, see figure.

Figure 40 - Main voltage switch of Panel PC Siemens

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 68 / 280

3.3.3 Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D power supply

The power supply input will accept 120/240V ac. The power supply is autoswitching. Ensure that sufficient power
is available, see figure.

Figure 41 - Main voltage switch of Panel PC VersaView 1500P Ser.A-D

In case of panel PC Ser.E the power switch is missing by the moment that the power supply is
autoranging in the range 100...240VAC.

3.3.4 Blind PC Pro-face PS-2000B power supply

Connect the power cord to the power input terminal located on the front face of the PS-B unit; see pictures.

Figure 42 - Main voltage switch of Blind PC, figure 1

WARNING!!
1. Be sure that the PS-B is turned off
2. Removed the terminal cover by using a Phillips screwdriver.
3. Unscrew and remove the middle screws (3) from the terminal block. Next, align each
crimp contact with its screw hole and tighten the screw.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 69 / 280

Figure 43 - Main voltage switch of Blind PC, figure 2

3.3.5 Siemens PC577 power supply

The Panel PC SIEMENS PC577 can be operated on 110/230 VAC power supplies using the power cable
provided. The power supply is provided at the panel backside with a manual mains voltage switch-over how the
panel PC SIEMENS IL70.

Figure 44 - Main voltage switch of SIEMENS PC577

3.3.6 Pro-face PS3650A-T41 power supply

The Panel PC PS3650A can be operated on 110/230 VAC with automatic detection

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 70 / 280

Figure 45 – Power supply connection of PS3650A-T41

3.3.7 Allen-Bradley VersaView 1500P Ser.E power supply

A grounded three-prong IEC320 power cord provides power to the computer. The power supply input accepts
100...240V AC and is autoranging.

IMPORTANT NOTE
If using an alternate IEC 320 cord, make sure the female end of the cord is sized
appropriately for the retention clip.

For these steps to connect AC power to performance and non display computers.
1. Connect the power cord to the AC power input
2. Secure the power cord in lace with the retention clip.

Figure 46 – Power supply connection of VersaView 1500P Ser.E

3. Apply 100...240V AC power to the computer.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 71 / 280

3.3.8 Siemens Simatic IPC577C power supply

The Panel PC Siemens Simatic IPC577C can be operated on 240 VAC power supplies (5) using the power
cable provided. The power supply is provided at the panel backside with a manual mains voltage switch-over.

Figure 47 - Main voltage switch of Siemens Simatic IPC577C

IMPORTANT NOTE
● Note the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions specified in the technical data
in your operating manual.
● The device is approved for operation in closed rooms only.
● Avoid extreme environmental operating conditions. Protect the device against dust,
moisture and heat.
● Do not place the device in direct sunlight.
● Ensure at least 100 mm of space above and below the device and between other
components or the sides of cabinets.
● Do not cover the vent slots of the device.
● Always observe the mounting positions permitted for this device.
● The device with DC power supply does not fulfill the requirements according to
EN 60950-1 in the power supply unit area. The device must therefore be installed in such
a ways is part of an operating area with restricted access (e.g. a locked switchgear
cabinet, control panel or server room).
● The connected or built-in peripherals should not introduce negative field voltage in excess
of 0.5 V into the device.
Failure to adhere to these conditions when mounting the system voids the approvals based
on UL 60950-1, UL 508 and EN 60950-1!

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 72 / 280

3.3.9 Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250

Connect the power cord to the power input terminal located on the front face of the blind PC APL3000-BA-
CD2G-2P-1G-NO250 unit; in the following mode.
(1) Confirm that power is not supplied to the PL unit.
(2) Push the Opening button with a small flat screw driver to open the desired pin hole.
(3) Insert each pin terminal into its designated hole. Release the opening button to clamp the pin place.
(4) After inserting all three pins, insert the power plug into the power connector at PL and fix the plug with
the screws.

Figure 48 - Main voltage switch of Blind PC APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250

3.3.10 Box PC “B&R APC 810” + Automation Panel 900

The 3-pin socket required for the supply voltage connection is not included in delivery. It can be ordered from
B&R using model number 0TB103.9 (screw clamp) or 0TB103.91 (cage clamp). The pinout can be found either
in the following table or printed on the APC810 housing. The supply voltage is protected internally by a soldered
fuse (15 A, fast-acting) to prevent damage to the device in the event of an overload (fuse replacement ecessary)
or if the voltage supply is connected incorrectly (reverse polarity protection - fuse replacement not necessary).
The device must be returned to B&R for repairs if the fuse is blown in the event of an error.

Supply voltage
Protected against reverse polarity
Pin Description
1 -
2 Functional ground
3 +
Model number Short description
Terminal blocks
0TB103.9 Connector 24 V 5.08 3-pin screw clamp
0TB103.91 Connector 24 V 5.08 3-pin cage clamp

Figure 49 - Main voltage switch of Box PC “B&R APC 810” & Automation Panel 900

IMPORTANT NOTEThe functional ground (pin 2) must be connected to ground (e.g. control
cabinet) using the shortest possible path. Using the largest possible conductor cross
section on the supply plug is recommended.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 73 / 280

3.3.11 Panel PC Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

A grounded three-prong IEC320 power cord provides power to the computer. The power supply input accepts
100...240V AC and is autoranging.

IMPORTANT NOTE
If using an alternate IEC 320 cord, make sure the female end of the cord is sized
appropriately for the retention clip.

For these steps to connect AC power to performance and non display computers.
4. Connect the power cord to the AC power input
5. Secure the power cord in lace with the retention clip.

Figure 50 – Power supply connection of Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

6. Apply 100...240V AC power to the computer.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 74 / 280

3.4 STEP3 – CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O BOARD

Connect the Remote I/O Profibus board Woodhead Applicom PCI-DPIO / PCU-DPIO or PCU-DP2IO to the
“Profibus port” (to be wired to the PLC I/O Profibus adaptor) and to the “Blackout connector” (to be wired to the
Digital Input/output modules).

3.4.1 Profibus connection by means of a D-SUB 9-pin connector.

3.4.1.1 PCI – DPIO board

3.4.1.2 PCU – DPIO board

BLACKOUT PROFIBUS PORT

DETECTOR

Figure 51 - Profibus remote I/O board Applicom

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 75 / 280
3.4.2 Blackout signal connection.
The Blackout connector must be supplied as follows :

0V +24V
Figure 52 - Blackout connector

REFERENCE
See also the electric wiring diagram of the machine.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 76 / 280

3.5 STEP4 – RS232 CONNECTION FOR DOOR SIDE 2 MESSAGE

DISPLAY

IMPORTANT NOTE
The message display is installed only if door side 2 is present and if no secondary panel pc
is present on side 2.

The LCD message display is connected to the PC's COM1 port as follows:

PANEL/BLIND C1 C2
PC A1 A2 LCD

A1: SUB D 9 PIN to RJ45 adapter C1: 8 wire twisted-pair cable

A2: RJ45 to flat cable adapter C2: flat cable

Figure 53 - LCD serial connection

REFERENCE
See also the electric wiring diagram of the machine.

REFERENCE
For the Panel/Blind PC COM1 connector location see relevant layout figure in SECTION 3.2.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 77 / 280

3.6 STEP5 – RS232 CONNECTION FOR MODBUS COMMUNICATION

(if present)

The MODBUS connection is installed on the PC's second serial port COM2.

NOTE
For the Siemens Simatic Industrial Lite 70 and PC577 Panel PCs no MODBUS connection is
available.

REFERENCE
For the PC COM2 connector location see relevant layout figure in SECTION 3.2.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 3 Page 78 / 280

3.7 STEP6 – ETHERNET PORT NETWORK CONNECTION TO HUB (if

present)

NOTE
A typical LAN configuration uses a HUB for the ethernet connection of the Side 1 PC, the Side 2
PC and the GUI PC.

REFERENCE
For the PC ETHERNET LAN NETWORK connector location see relevant layout figure in SECTION
3.2.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 79 / 280

Section 4 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

4 THEMA4 SOFTWARE SETUP

4.1 - SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
4.1.1 - Items required for software installation/configuration
4.2 - STEP 1 – PANEL PC BIOS SETUP
4.2.1 - Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y
4.2.2 - Siemens Industrial Lite 70
4.2.3 - Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P - Ser.A
4.2.4 - Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P - Ser.B,C,D
4.2.5 - Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P - Ser.E
4.2.6 - Pro-face Blind PC PS-2000B
4.2.7 - Siemens PC577
4.2.8 - Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41
4.2.9 - Siemens Simatic IPC577C
4.2.10 - DIGITAL PROFACE PRO-FACE APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-
1G-NO250
4.2.11 - B&R APC 810
4.2.12 - ALLEN BRADLEY 1500P SER.F
4.3 - STEP 2 - SW INSTALLATION BY RECOVERY DISK
4.3.1 - Installation from floppy
4.3.2 - Installation from network
4.3.3 - Installation from USB device
4.4 - STEP 3 - PC CONFIGURATION BY
“CONFIGURATION MENU“
4.5 - STEP 4 - SOFTWARE VERSIONS IDENTIFICATION
4.6 - STEP 5 - PT100/4-20MA
4.6.1 - INOR IPAQ-L/L+ transmitter
4.7 - STEP 6 – MODULES/EQUIPMENTS
CONFIGURATION BY GUI
4.7.1 - General information
4.7.2 - Siemens ET200M
4.7.3 - Siemens ET200S
4.7.4 - Allen Bradley Flex I/O
4.7.5 - Allen Bradley POINT I/O
4.7.6 - SMC EX250

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 80 / 280

4.7.7 - SMC EX500

4.7.8 - DP/DP COUPLER
4.7.9 - SMC EX260
4.7.10 - B&R X20+X67
4.7.11 - SEW MOVIMOT
4.7.12 - Kawasaki ROBOTS
4.7.13 - Siemens Safety PLC
4.7.14 - Heidenhain Encoder
4.8 - STEP 7 - SW COMPONENTS UPGRADE
4.9 - STEP 8 – PRINTER FIRMWARE
4.9.1 - Firmware configuration for CUSTOM TPT112HP printer
4.9.2 - Firmware configuration for APS printer
4.9.3 - Firmware configuration for CUSTOM PLUS4 printer
4.10 - STEP 9 – LCD FIRMWARE
4.10.1 - Firmware configuration for LCD MATRIX ORBITAL

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 81 / 280

4.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

The SW installation procedure on the Thema4 system PCs, is composed of the following main steps:

STEP 1 Panel PC BIOS setup

STEP 2 Software installation using RECOVERY DISK
Step 2.1 Installing by network
Step 2.2 Installing by floppies
STEP 3 Panel configuration using CONFIGURATION MENU
STEP 4 Software versions verification
STEP 5 Pt100/4-20mA converter configuration (only when install/change the
converter)
STEP 6 Modules and equipments configuration on Thema4 GUI
STEP 7 Software components upgrade
STEP 8 Printer firmware upgrade (only for systems equipped with W27 or later)
STEP 9 LCD firmware upgrade (only for systems equipped with GLK 12232)

NOTE
In case of software (or hardware) components upgrade, without the installation of a new Panel PC,
it is enough to use the functions of Step 7 - Software components upgrade and, eventually, Step 8
and 9.

NOTE
The Panel PC BIOS setup is the same for PC side 1 (primary), 2 or 3 (not primary).

4.1.1 Items required for software installation/configuration

The Thema4 PC SW installation requires the following items :
 A keyboard to connect to the PC
 An external monitor (necessary for blind PC only)
 The RECOVERY DISK (necessary for the first Thema4 installation)
 Thema4 System software on CD / floppy disks

If installing through the network the following items are needed in addition:
 A remote PC (Host) with network connection and TCP/IP driver installed
 A “cross-over” Ethernet cable or 2 Ethernet cables with HUB connection
 Windows FTP Server program

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 82 / 280

4.2 STEP 1 – PANEL PC BIOS SETUP

Follow the BIOS settings of the different Panel/Blind PCs.

4.2.1 Digital Pro-face PL692x-T4y

Connect the keyboard to the Panel-PC, switch the power supply on and press the Del key to enter the main
BIOS menu.

> Standard CMOS Features > Frequency/Voltage Control

> Advanced BIOS Features Load Fail-Safe Defaults
> Advanced Chipset Features Load Optimized Defaults
> Integrated Peripherals Set Supervisor Password
> Power Management Setup Set User Password
> PnP/PCI Configurations Save & Exit Setup
> PC Health Status Exit Without Saving

Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

To save and exit from BIOS setup, select “Save & Exit Setup” in BIOS menu, or push F10 on the keyboard.

 Standard CMOS Features

Date(mm:dd:yy) Mon,Nov 3 2003
Time(hh:mm:ss 8 : 36 : 44
> IDE Primary Master [IC25N020ATCS04-0]
> IDE Primary Slave [None]
Drive A [1.44M, 3.5 in]
Drive B [None]
Video [EGA/VGA]
Halt On [All, But Disk/Key]
Base Memory 640K
Extended Memory 129024K
Total Memory 130048K

 Standard CMOS Features\IDE Primary Master

IDE HDD Auto-Detection [Press Enter]
IDE Primary Master [Auto]
Access Mode [Auto]
Capacity 20005MB
Cylinder 38760
Head 16
Precomp 0
Landing Zone 38759
Sector 63

 Standard CMOS Features\IDE Primary Slave

IDE HDD-Auto-Detection [Press Enter]
IDE Primary Master [Auto]
Access Mode [Auto]
Capacity 0MB
Cylinder 0
Head 0
Precomp 0
Landing Zone 0
Sector 0

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 83 / 280

 Advanced BIOS Features

Virus Warning [Disabled]
CPU Internal cache [Enabled]
External cache [Enabled]
CPU L2 Cache ECC Chacking [Enabled]
Processor Number Feature [Enabled]
Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled]
First Boot Device [Floppy]
Second Boot Device [HDD-0]
Third Boot Device [CDROM]
Fourth Boot Device [Disabled]
Swap Floppy Drive [Disabled]
Boot Up Floppy Seek [Enabled]
Boot Up NumLock Status [On]
Gate A20 Option [Fast]
Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled]
xTypematic Rate (chars/sec) 6
xTypematic Delay (Msec) 250
Security Option [Setup]
PS/2 Mouse Function Ctrl [Disabled]
OS Select For DRAM > 64MB [Non-OS2]
HDD S.M.A.R.T. Capability [Disabled]
Report No FDD For WIN95 [No]

 Advanced Chipset Features

SDRAM CAS Latency Time [3]
SDRAM Cycle Time Tras/Trc [Auto]
SDRAM RAS-to-CAS Delay [Auto]
SDRAM RAS Precharge Time [Auto]
System BIOS Cacheable [Enabled]
Video BIOS Cacheable [Enabled]
Memory Hole At 15M-16M [Disabled]
CPU Latency Timer [Enabled]
Delayed Transaction [Enabled]
On-Chip Video Window Size [64MB]

 Integrated Peripherals
On-Chip Primary PCI IDE [Enabled]
IDE Primary Master PIO [Auto]
IDE Primary Slave PIO [Auto]
IDE Primary Master UDMA [Auto]
IDE Primary Slave UDMA [Auto]
USB Controller [Enabled]
USB Keyboard Support [Disabled]
Init Display First [PCI Slot]
AC97 Audio [Disabled]
Onboard LAN [Enabled]
IDE HDD Block Mode [Enabled]
POWER ON Function [BUTTON ONLY]
KB Power ON Password Enter
Hot Key Power ON Ctrl-F1
Onboard FDC Controller [Enabled]
Onboard Serial Port 1 [3F8/IRQ4]
Onboard Serial Port 2 [2F8/IRQ3]
Onboard Serial Port 3 [3E8H/IRQ9]
Onboard Serial Port 4 [2E8H/IRQ10]
Onboard Parallel Port [3BC/IRQ7]
Parallel Port Mode [SPP]
EPP Mode Select EPP1.7
ECP Mode Use DMA 3
PWRON After PWR-Fail [On]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 84 / 280

 Power Management Setup

Power Management [User Define]
Video Off Method [V/H SYNC+Blank]
Video Off In Suspend [Yes]
Suspend Type [Stop Grant]
Suspend Mode [Disabled]
HDD Power Down [Disabled]
Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN [Instant-Off]
Power On by Ring [Disabled]
CPU Therma-Throttling [50.0%]

** Reload Global Timer Events **

Primary IDE 0 [Disabled]
Primary IDE 1 [Disabled]
FDD,COM,LPT Port [Disabled]
PCI PIRQ[A-D]# [Disabled]

 PnP/PCI Configurations
PNP OS Installed [Yes]
Reset Configuration Data [Disabled]
Resource Controlled by [Manual]
> IRQ Resources [Press Enter]
> DMA Resources [Press Enter]
PCI/VGA Palette Snoop [Disabled]
Assign IRQ For VGA [Enabled]
Assign IRQ For USB [Enabled]

 PnP/PCI Configurations\IRQ Resources

IRQ-3 assigned to [Legacy ISA]
IRQ-4 assigned to [Legacy ISA]
IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI/ISA PnP]
IRQ-7 assigned to [Legacy ISA]
IRQ-9 assigned to [Legacy ISA]
IRQ-10 assigned to [Legacy ISA]
IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI/ISA PnP]
IRQ-12 assigned to [Legacy ISA]
IRQ-14 assigned to [Legacy ISA]
IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI/ISA PnP]

 PnP/PCI Configurations\DMA Resources

DMA-0 assigned to [PCI/ISA PnP]
DMA-1 assigned to [PCI/ISA PnP]
DMA-3 assigned to [PCI/ISA PnP]
DMA-5 assigned to [PCI/ISA PnP]
DMA-6 assigned to [PCI/ISA PnP]
DMA-7 assigned to [PCI/ISA PnP]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 85 / 280

 PC Health Status
System Warning Temperature [Disabled]
CPU Warning Temperature [Disabled]
Warning Voltage IN0(V) [Disabled]
Warning Voltage IN1(V) [Disabled]
Warning Voltage +3.3V [Disabled]
Warning Voltage +5V [Disabled]
Warning Voltage +12V [Disabled]
Warning Voltage –12V [Disabled]
Warning Voltage –5V [Disabled]
Fan1 speed limit [Disabled]
Fan2 speed limit [Disabled]

 Frequency/Voltage Control
Auto Detect DIMM/PCI Clk [Enabled]
Spread Spectrum [Disabled]
Clock By Slight Adjust [100]

4.2.1.1 Enabling USB

To enable USB on this Panel PC the following settings must be made:
- in page “Integrated Peripherals” set “USB controller” to enabled and “USB keyboard support” to disabled
- in page “PnP/PCI Configuration” set “Assign IRQ for USB” to enabled

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 86 / 280

4.2.2 Siemens Industrial Lite 70

Connect the keyboard to the PC, switch the power supply on and press the F2 key to enter the BIOS menu.
Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
Main Advanced Security Power Exit

IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

 Main
System Time: [12:13:19]
System Date: [01/19/200]
Diskette A: [1.4M]
> IDE Drive 1: [IC25N020ATCS04-0-(PM)]
IDE Drive 2: [None]
> IDE Drive 3: [FX40++W-(SM)]
IDE Drive 4: [None]
> Boot options
Base memory: 640k
Extended memory: 246M

 Main\IDE Drive 1
Type: [Auto]
LBA Format
Total Sectors: 39070080
Maximun Capacity: 20004M
Transfer Mode: [16 Sectors]
LBA Translation : [Enabled]
32 Bit I/O: [Enabled]
PIO mode: [PIO 4 / DMA 2]
Ultra DMA Mode: [Mode 5]
Hard Disk Silent Mode: [Disabled]
Hard Disk SMART: [Enabled]
HD – ID: 0439039482

 Main\IDE Drive 3
Type: [Auto]
Transfer Mode: [16 Sectors]
LBA Translation : [Enabled]
32 Bit I/O: [Enabled]
PIO mode: [PIO 4 / DMA 2]
Ultra DMA Mode: [Mode 2]

 Main\Boot Options
Post Errors: [No halt on any errors]
Fast boot: [Enabled]
Quiet boot: [Enabled]
Primary display: [AGP VGA]
Boot Menu: [Enabled]
Boot sequence:
- Diskette
Standard
- Hard Drive
IC25N020ATCS04-0-(PM)
! Alternate Device
! FX40++W-(SM)
CD-ROM Drive
Legacy LAN Card

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 87 / 280

 Advanced
> Peripheral Configuration
> PCI Configuration
> Advanced system configuration
> System management
Reset configuration date: [No]
Lock Setup Configuration: [No]

 Advanced \Peripheral configuration

Serial 1: [Enabled]
Serial 1 address: [3F8h, IRQ4]
Serial 2: [Enabled]
Serial 1 address: [2F8h, IRQ3]
Parallel: [Enabled]
Parallel Mode: [Printer]
Parallel address: [378h, IRQ7]
Diskette Controller: [Enabled]
Hard Disk Controller: [Both]
Mouse Controller: [Auto Detect]
LAN Controller: [Enabled]
LAN Remote Boot: [Disabled]
Audio Controller: [Auto]

 Advanced \PCI Configuration

PCI IRQ Line 1: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 2: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 3: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 4: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 5: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 6: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 7: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 8: [Auto]

 Advanced \Advanced system configuration

PCI Bus Parity Checking: [Disabled]
Graphics aperture: [64 Mb]
USB Host Controller: [Enabled]
USB 2.0 Host Controller: [Enabled]
USB Legacy support: [Disabled]
BIOS Work Space Location: [Expansion ROM Area]
Discard Timer Mode: [1024 clocks]

 Advanced \System management

Fan Control: [Ehanced Cooling]
SM Error Halt: [Disabled]
Fan State:
CPU: OK
Auxiliary: None
Power supply: OK
Temp:
CPU: OK
System: OK
Battery state: OK

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 88 / 280

 Security
Setup Password Not installed
System Password Not installed
Set setup password: [Press Enter]
Setup Password Lock: [Standard]
Set System Password: [Press Enter]
System Password Mode: [System]
System Load: [Standard]
Setup Prompt: [Enabled]
Virus Warning: [Disabled]
Diskette write: [Enabled]
Flash Write: [Enabled]
MemoryBird Systemlock: [Disabled]
SmartCard Systemlock: [Disabled]
> Hard Disk Security

 Security\Hard Disk Security

Hard Disk Security [Disabled]

 Power
APM Interface: [Disabled]
APM Power Saving: [Disabled]
Standby Timeout: [Disabled]
Suspend Timeout: [Disabled]
Hard disk Timeout: [Disabled]
APM Resume Timer: [Disabled]
Resume Time: [00:00:00]
ACPI Save to Ram: [Disabled]
> Power ON-OFF

 Power\power ON-OFF
Power-on Source [BIOS Controlled]
LAN: [Enabled]
Wake Up Timer: [Disabled]
Wake Up Time: [00.00.00]
Wake Up Mode: [Daily]
Power-off Source:
Software: [Enabled]
Keyboard: [Disabled]
Power button: [Enabled]
LAN Wake Up Mode:
Monitor: [On]
Power Failure Recovery: [Always On]

To save and exit from BIOS setup, select “Save & Exit Setup” in BIOS menu, or push F10 on the keyboard.

4.2.2.1 Enabling USB

To enable USB on this Panel PC the following settings must be made:
- in page “Advanced/Advanced System Configuration” set “USB Host controller” to enabled, “USB 2.0 Host
controller” to enabled and “USB legacy support” to disabled

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 89 / 280

4.2.3 Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P - Ser.A

Connect the keyboard to the Panel-PC, switch the power supply on and press the Del key to enter the BIOS
menu.
> Standard CMOS Features > Frequency/Voltage Control
> Advanced BIOS Features Load Fail-Safe Defaults
> Advanced Chipset Features Load Optimized Defaults
> Integrated Peripherals Set Password
> Power Management Setup Save & Exit Setup
> PnP/PCI Configurations Exit Without Saving
> PC Health Status
Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Panel-PC Allen Bradley Ser. A can be Rev.A or Rev.B. In case of panels Rev.B disable the
sound card when installing a software version W23 or more recent. This can be done setting
to “disabled” the parameter “SIS – 7018 AC97 AUDIO” under “Integrated Peripherals\SIS 630
OnChip PCI Device”.
Failing to do so will cause a crash during the startup of the panel PC.

 Standard CMOS Features

Date(mm:dd:yy) Mon,Nov 3 2003
Time(hh:mm:ss 8 : 36 : 44
> IDE Primary Master [IC25N020ATCS04-0]
> IDE Primary Slave [None]
> IDE Secondary Master [None]
> IDE Secondary Slave [MATSHITADVD-ROM SR-8]
Drive A [1.44M, 3.5 in]
LCD&CRT [Both]
Panel [Hardware Setting]
Halt On [All, But Keyboard]
Base Memory 640K
Extended Memory 252928K
Total Memory 253952K

 Standard CMOS Features\IDE Primary Master

IDE HDD Auto-Detection [Press Enter]
IDE Primary Master [Auto]
Access Mode [Auto]
Capacity 20005MB
Cylinder 38760
Head 16
Precomp 0
Landing Zone 38759
Sector 63

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 90 / 280

 Standard CMOS Features\IDE Primary Slave

IDE HDD-Auto-Detection [Press Enter]
IDE Primary Master [Auto]
Access Mode [Auto]
Capacity 0MB
Cylinder 0
Head 0
Precomp 0
Landing Zone 0
Sector 0

 Standard CMOS Features\IDE Secondary Master

IDE HDD-Auto-Detection [Press Enter]
IDE Primary Master [Auto]
Access Mode [Auto]
Capacity 0MB
Cylinder 0
Head 0
Precomp 0
Landing Zone 0
Sector 0

 Standard CMOS Features\IDE Secondary Slave

IDE HDD-Auto-Detection [Press Enter]
IDE Primary Master [Auto]
Access Mode [Auto]
Capacity 0MB
Cylinder 0
Head 0
Precomp 0
Landing Zone 0
Sector 0

 Advanced BIOS Features

Processor Number Feature [Disabled]
Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled]
First Boot Device [Floppy]
Second Boot Device [CDROM]
Third Boot Device [HDD-0]
Boot Other Device [Enabled]
Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled]
Boot Up NumLock Status [On]
Typematic Rate Setting [Enabled]
Typematic Rate chars/sec) [30]
Typematic Delay (Msec) [250]
Security Option [Setup]

 Advanced Chipset Features

Memory Post write Control [Disabled]
Power-Supply Type [ATX]
Memory Parity Check [Enabled]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 91 / 280

 Integrated Peripherals
> SIS 630 OnChip IDE Device [Press Enter]
> SIS 630 OnChip PCI Device [Press Enter]
> Onboard SuperIO Device [Press Enter]
USB Controller [Enabled]
USB Keyboard Support [Enabled]
Init Display First [PCI Slot]
Fast Write Capability Enabled
AGP 4X Capability Enabled
System Share Memory Size [8MB]

 Integrated Peripherals\SIS 630 OnChip IDE Device

Internal PCI/IDE [Both]
IDE Primary Master PIO [Auto]
IDE Primary Slave PIO [Auto]
IDE Secondary Master PIO [Auto]
IDE Secondary Slave PIO [Auto]
Primary Master UltraDMA [Auto]
Primary Slave UltraDMA [Auto]
Secondary Master UltraDMA [Auto]
Secondary Slave UltraDMA [Auto]

 Integrated Peripherals\SIS 630 OnChip PCI Device

SIS – 7018 AC97 AUDIO [Enabled]

IMPORTANT NOTE
Set this parameter to “disabled” when installing a software version W23 or more recent on a
panel PC Allen Bradley Ser.A Rev. B.
Failing to do so will cause a crash during the startup of the panel PC.

 Integrated Peripherals\Onboard SuperIO Device

Onboard FDC Controller [Enabled]
Onboard Serial Port 1 [3F8/IRQ4]
Onboard Serial Port 1 [2F8/IRQ3]
UART Mode Select [Normal]
xUR2 Duplex Mode half
Onboard Parallel Port [378/IRQ7]
Parallel Port Mode [EPP]
xECP Mode Use DMA 3
Onboard Serial Port 3 [2E8]
Serial Port 3 Use IRQ [IRQ10]
Onboard Serial Port 4 [3E8]
Serial Port 4 Use IRQ [IRQ11]
Onboard Parallel Port 2 [278]
Parallel Port 2 Use IRQ [IRQ5]

 Power Management Setup

ACPI function [Enabled]
ACPI Suspend Type S1(POS)
Video Off Option [Susp, Stby -> Off]
Video Off Method [V/H SYNC+Blank]
Switch Function [Break/Wake]
Hot Key Function As [Power Off]
HDD Off After [Disable]
Power Button Override [Instant Off]
Power State Resume Control [Always On]
> PM Wake Up Events [Press Enter]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 92 / 280

 Power Management Setup\PM Wake Up Events

IRQ[3-7, 9-15], NMI [Enabled]
IRQ 8 Break Suspend [Disabled]
RING Power Up Control [Enabled]

 PnP/PCI Configurations
Reset Configuration Data [Disabled]
Resources Controlled By [Auto(ESCD)]
xIRQ Resources Press Enter

 PC Health Status
Vcore 1.47V
2.5V 2.48V
3.3V 3.34V
+5V 4.99V
+12V 11.90V
3VSB 3.32V
Temperature 1 (-)55°C
Temperature 2 30°C
Fan 1 Speed 7336 RPM
Fan 2 Speed 0 RPM

 Frequency/Voltage Control
Spread Spectrum [Enabled]

To save and exit from BIOS setup, select “Save & Exit Setup” in BIOS menu, or push F10 on the keyboard.

4.2.3.1 Enabling USB

To enable USB on this Panel PC the following settings must be made: in page “Integrated Peripheral” set “USB
controller” to enabled.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 93 / 280

4.2.4 Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P - Ser.B,C,D

Connect the keyboard to the Panel-PC, switch the power supply on and press the Del key to enter the BIOS
menu.
AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY – VERSION 1.54
(C)2001 American Megatrends, Inc. All Rights Reserved

Standard CMOS Setup

Advanced CMOS Setup
Advanced Chipset Setup
Power Management Setup
PCI / Plug and Play Setup
Peripheral Setup
Hardware monitor Setup
Auto-Detect Hard Disk
Change User Password
Change Supervisor Password
Auto Configuration with Optimal Settings
Auto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings
Save Settings and Exit
Exit Without Saving
Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

 Standard CMOS Setup

Date (mm/dd/yyyy): Thu Jan 27,2005 Base Memory: 639M

Time (hh/mm/ss) : 15:40:02 Extd Memory; 503M

Floppy Drive A: 1.44 MB3½

LBA Blk PIO 32Bit

Type Size Cyln Head Wpcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode
Pri Master: Auto On
Pri Slave : Auto On
Sec Master: Auto On
Sec Slave : Auto On

Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled

Month Jan - Dec
Day: 01 - 31
Year: 1980 - 2099

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 94 / 280

 Advanced CMOS Setup

Quick Boot Enabled
1st Boot Device Floppy
2nd Boot Device CD/DVD
3rd Boot Device IDE-0
Try Other Boot Device Yes
Boot From Lan Disabled
Floppy Access Control Read-Write
Hard Disk Access Control Read-Write
S.M.A.R.T. for Hard Disks Enabled
BootUp Num Lock On
Floppy Drive Seek Disabled
PS/2 Mouse Support Enabled
System Keyboard Absent
Primary Display VGA/EGA
Password check Setup
CPU Microcode Updation Enabled
BIOS Protect Enabled
System BIOS Cacheable Disabled
C000,32k Shadow Cached
C800,16k Shadow Disabled
CC00,16k Shadow Disabled
D000,16k Shadow Disabled
D400,16k Shadow Disabled
D800,16k Shadow Disabled
DC00,16k Shadow Disabled

 Advanced Chipset Setup

****** DRAM timing ******
Internal Graphics Mode Select 8MB
AGP Aperture Size 64MB
USB Controller 2 USB Ports
USB 1.1 Device Legacy Support All Device
USB 1.1 Port 64/60 Emulation Enabled
****** Display Setting *****
Boot Display Device CRT+LFP

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 95 / 280

 Power Management Setup

ACPI Aware O/S (S1) Yes
Re-Call VGA BIOS at S3 Resuming Enabled
Power Management/APM Enabled
Video Power Down Mode Disabled
Hard Disk Power Down Mode Disabled
Standby Time Out (Minute) Disabled
Suspend Time Out (Minute) Disabled
Primary Master IDE Monitor
Primary Slave IDE Ignore
Secondary Master IDE Monitor
Secondary Slave IDE Ignore
Power Button Function On/Off
Restore on AC/Power Loss Power On
Resume On Ring Disabled
Resume On LAN Disabled
Resume On PME# Disabled
Resume On RTC Alarm Disabled
RTC Alarm Date 15
RTC Alarm Hour 12
RTC Alarm Minute 30
RTC Alarm Second 30
Power Type Select ATX

 PCI/Plug And Play Setup

Clear NVRAM No
PCI Latency Timer (PCI Clocks) 64
Init.Graphics Adapter Priority PCI/Int-VGA
Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA Yes
OffBoard PCI IDE Card Auto
OffBoard PCI IDE Primary IRQ Disabled
OffBoard PCI IDE Secondary IRQ Disabled
PCI Slot1 IRQ Priority Auto
PCI Slot2 IRQ Priority Auto
PCI Slot3 IRQ Priority Auto
PCI Slot4 IRQ Priority Auto

 Peripheral Setup
OnBoard IDE Both
OnBoard LAN Enabled
OnBoard AC’97 Audio Enabled
OnBoard FDC Enabled
OnBoard Serial Port1 3F8/COM1
OnBoard Serial Port2 2F8/COM2
Serial Port2 Mode Normal
OnBoard Parallel Port 378
Parallel Port Mode EPP
Parallel Port IRQ 7
Parallel Port DMA Channel N/A
OnBoard Serial Port C 2E8/COM4
Serial Port C IRQ 10
OnBoard Serial Port D 3E8/COM3
Serial Port D IRQ 11
OnBoard Parallel Port2 Auto
Parallel Port 2 IRQ Auto

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 96 / 280

 Hardware Monitor Setup

-= System Hardware Monitor =-
CPU Case Temperature 22°C/71°F
System Temperature 50°C/122°F
Fan_1 Speed 10227 RPM
Fan_2 Speed 13500 RPM
Vcore 1.536 V
+1.5V 1.504 V
+3.3V 3.392 V
+5.0V 5.278 V
+12.0V 11.983 V
-12.0V -12.203 V
-5.0V -4.993 V
+5V SB 5.305 V
Battery 2.912 V

4.2.4.1 Enabling USB

To enable USB on this Panel PC the following settings must be made:
- in page “Advanced chipset Setup” set “USB Controller” to 2 USB Ports, “USB Controller” to All Device and
“USB Controller” to Enabled.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 97 / 280

4.2.5 Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P - Ser.E

Connect a USB keyboard to the PC, switch the power supply on and press the F2 key to enter the BIOS menu.

Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
Information Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exit
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

 Information
CPU Type: Intel(R) Core(TM) Duo CPU U2500 @1.2GHz
CPU Speed: 1200 MHz
System BIOS Version: R100 STD&PER
VGA BIOS Version: 1533
Manufacture Name: Rockwell Automation / Allen-Bradley

Runtime hours 0

NOTE
The System BIOS Version can be also “R104 STD&PER”

 Main
System Time: [06:30:48]
System Date: [05/25/2009]
> SATA Port 0: [TEAC DV-W28S-U-(S1]
> SATA Port 1: [FUJITSU MHY2040BH ESW]
> IDE Primary/Master: [None]
USB BIOS Legacy Support: [Enabled]
System memory: 640 KB
Extended memory: 1014 MB
Video Memory: 8 MB

NOTE
The DVD on SATA Port 0 is not present if BIOS version is R100.

 Advanced
> Video Control Sub-Menu
> SUPER I/O
> Hardware Monitor
Front USB Control [Enabled]
Rear USB Control [Enabled]
PXE OPROM: [Disabled]
SERR# Enable: [Disabled]

NOTE
The Item “SERR# Enable” is not present if BIOS version is R100.

 Advanced\Video Control Sub-Menu

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 98 / 280

DVMT 3.0 Mode: [Fixed]

Pre-Allocated Memory Size: [8MB]
Total Graphics Memory: [64MB]
DVMT Graphics Memory: 56MB

 Advanced\SUPER I/O
Serial Port A: [Enabled]
Base I/O address/IRQ: [3F8/IRQ 4]
Serial Port B: [Enabled]
Base I/O address/IRQ: [2F8/IRQ 3]
Parallel Port: [Enabled]
Mode: [B-Directonal]
Base I/O address: [378]

 Advanced\Hardware Monitor
V+core = 0.91 V
Vcc+1.5 = 1.47 V
V+3.3 = 3.24 V
V+5 = 4.80 V
V+12 = 12.02 V

CPU Temperature = 31 °C/87 °F

Ambient Temp = 38 °C/98 °F
North Bridge Temp = 50 °C/122 °F

 Security
Supervisor Password is: Not Set
User Password is: Not Set
Set Supervisor Pawword: [Enter]
Set User Password: [Enter]

 Power
After Power Failure: [Power On]
Wake On Lan: [Disabled]

 Boot
Boot Priority Order:
1: USB CD/DVDOptiarc DVD RW AD-7530B
2: IDE 1: FUJITSU MHY2040BH ESW-(S3
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:

 Exit
Exit Saving Changes
Exit Discarding Changes
Load Setup Defaults
Discard Changes
Save Changes

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 99 / 280

4.2.6 Pro-face Blind PC PS-2000B

Connect the keyboard to the Panel-PC, switch the power supply on and press the F2 key to enter the BIOS
menu.
Phoenix FirstBIOS(tm) Desktop CMOS Setup Utility

> Standard CMOS Features > Frequency/Voltage Control

> Advanced BIOS Features Load Fail-Safe Defaults
> Advanced Chipset Features Load Optimized Defaults
> Integrated Peripherals Set Supervisor Password
> Power Management Setup Set User Password
> PnP/PCI Configurations Save & Exit Setup
> System Monitor Setup Exit Without Saving
Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

 Standard CMOS Features

Date(mm:dd:yy) Thu, Jan 27 2005
Time(hh:mm:ss 15 : 40 : 02
IDE Primary Master [IC25N020ATMR04-0]
IDE Primary Slave [None]
IDE Secondary Master [CD-224E]
IDE Secondary Slave [None]
Drive A [1.44M, 3.5 in.]
Drive B [None]
Video [EGA/VGA]
Halt On [All, But Keyboard]
Base Memory 640K
Extended Memory 259072K
Total Memory 260096K

 Advanced BIOS Features

Virus Warning [Disabled]
CPU Internal Cache [Enabled]
External Cache [Enabled]
CPU L2 Cache ECC Checking [Enabled]
Processor Number Feature [Enabled]
Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled]
First Boot Device [Floppy]
Second Boot Device [HDD-0]
Third Boot Device [CDROM]
Fourth Boot Device [Disabled]
Swap Floppy Drive [Disabled]
Boot Up Floppy Seek [Enabled]
Boot Up NumLock Status [On]
Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled]
x Typematic Rate (Char/Sec) 6
x Typematic Delay (Msec) 250
Security Option [Setup]
FirstWare Language [English]
Authentication Level [Low]
OS Select For DRAM > 64MB [Non-OS2]
HDD S.M.A.R.T. Capability [Disabled]
Report No FDD For Win 95 [No]
Video BIOS Shadow [Enabled]
Small Logo(EPA) Show [Disabled]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 100 / 280

 Advanced Chipset Features

SDRAM CAS Latency Time [3]
SDRAM Cycle Time Tras/Trc [Auto]
SDRAM RAS-to-CAS Delay [Auto]
SDRAM RAS Precharge Time [Auto]
System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled]
Video BIOS Cacheable [Disabled]
Memory Hole At 15M-16M [Disabled]
CPU Latency Timer [Enabled]
Delayed Transaction [Enabled]
AGP Graphics Aperture Size [64MB]
On-Chip Video Window Size [64MB]

 Integrated Peripherals
On-Chip Primary PCI IDE [Enabled]
On-Chip Secondary PCI IDE [Enabled]
IDE Primary Master PIO [Auto]
IDE Primary Slave PIO [Auto]
IDE Secondary Master PIO [Auto]
IDE Secondary Slave PIO [Auto]
IDE Primary Master UDMA [Auto]
IDE Primary Slave UDMA [Auto]
IDE Secondary Master UDMA [Auto]
IDE Secondary Slave UDMA [Auto]
USB Controller [Enabled]
USB Keyboard Support [Disabled]
USB Mouse Support [Disabled]
Init Display First [PCI Slot]
AC97 Audio [Disabled]
Onboard LAN1 [Enabled]
Onboard LAN2 [Disabled]
IDE HDD Block Mode [Enabled]
Onboard FDC Controller [Enabled]
Onboard Serial Port 1 [3F8/IRQ4]
Onboard Serial Port 2 [2F8/IRQ3]
Onboard Parallel Port [Disabled]
x Parallel Port Mode SPP
x EPP Mode Select EPP1.7
x ECP Mode Use DMA 3
Onboard Serial Port 3 [3E8]
Serial Port 3 Use IRQ [IRQ11]
Onboard Serial Port 4 [2E8]
Serial Port 4 Use IRQ [IRQ10]

 Power Management Setup

ACPI Function [Enabled]
Power Management [User Define]
Video Off Method [DPMS]
Video Off In Suspend [Yes]
Suspend Type [Stop Grant]
Suspend Mode [Disabled]
HDD Power Down [Disabled]
Wake-Up by PCI Card [Disabled]
** Reload Global Timer Events **
Primary IDE 0 [Disabled]
Primary IDE 1 [Disabled]
Secondary IDE 0 [Disabled]
Secondary IDE 1 [Disabled]
FDD,COM,LPT Port [Disabled]
PCI PIRQ[A-D]# [Disabled]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 101 / 280

 PnP/PCI Configuration
Reset Configuration Data [Disabled]
Resources Controlled by [Auto(ESCD)]
x IRQ Resources Press Enter
x DMS Resources Press Enter
PCI/VGA Palette Snoop [Disabled]
Assign IRQ For VGA [Enabled]
INT Pin 1 Assignment [Auto]
INT Pin 2 Assignment [Auto]
INT Pin 3 Assignment [Auto]
INT Pin 4 Assignment [Auto]
INT Pin 5 Assignment [Auto]
INT Pin 6 Assignment [Auto]
INT Pin 7 Assignment [Auto]
INT Pin 8 Assignment [Auto]

 System Monitor Setup

CPU Warning Temperature [Disabled]
System Warning Temperature [Disabled]
Warning Voltage VcoreA [Disabled]
Warning Voltage VcoreB [Disabled]
Warning Voltage +3.3 V [Disabled]
Warning Voltage +5 V [Disabled]
Warning Voltage +12 V [Disabled]
Warning Voltage –12 V [Disabled]
CPU Fan Speed Limit [Disabled]
Power Fan Speed Limit [Disabled]

 Frequency/Voltage Control
Auto Detect DIMM/PCI Clk [Enabled]
Spread Spectrum [Disabled]

4.2.6.1 Enabling USB

To enable USB on this Panel PC the following settings must be made:
- in page “Advanced chipset Setup” set “USB Controller” to USB Controller, “USB Keyboard Support” to
Disabled and “USB Mouse Support” to Disabled.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 102 / 280

4.2.7 Siemens PC577

Connect the keyboard to the PC, switch the power supply on and press the F2 key to enter the BIOS menu.
Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
Main Advanced Security Power Exit
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

 Main
System Time: [15:19:49]
System Date: [03/20/2006]
Diskette A: [1.4M]
> Standard IDE: [FUJITSU MHT2040AT-(PM)]
> Standard IDE: [SAMSUNG CD-RIM SN-124-(SM)]
> Boot options
Base memory: 640k
Extended memory: 246M

 Main\Standard IDE
Standard IDE: [FUJITSU MHW2040AT-(PM)]
Maximun Capacity: 40 Gbyte
PIO mode: PIO 4
DMA Mode: UDMA 2
Silent Mode: [Disabled]
Password Status: Not Installed
Change password: [Press Enter]

 Main\Standard IDE
Standard IDE: [TOSHIBA CDW/DVD SDR2612C-(SM)]
PIO mode: PIO 4
DMA Mode: UDMA 2
Password Status: Not supported
Change password: [Press Enter]

 Main\Boot Options
Post Errors: [No halt on any errors]
Fast boot: [Enabled]
Quiet boot: [Enabled]
Primary display: [AGP VGA]
Boot Menu: [Enabled]
> Boot sequence

 Main\Boot Options\Boot Sequence

Boot sequence:
- Diskette
USB floppy drive
! Standard
- Hard Drive
[FUJITSU MHT2040AT-(PM)]
! Alternate Device
CD-ROM Drive
Legacy LAN Card
BootManage PXE, Slot 0208

 Advanced

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 103 / 280

WARNING!!
Setup Warning :
Setting items on this menu to incorrect values may cause your system to malfunction.

> Peripheral Configuration

> PCI Configuration
> Advanced system configuration
> System management
Reset configuration date: [No]

 Advanced\Peripheral configuration
Serial 1: [Auto]
Serial 2: [Auto]
Parallel: [Auto]
Parallel mode: [ECP]
USB Host Controller: [Enabled]
USB 2.0 Host Controller: [Enabled]
USB Legacy Support: [Enabled]
> ATA Controller config
Diskette Controller: [Enabled]
Mouse Controller: [Auto Detect]
LAN Controller: [Enabled]
LAN Remote Boot: [Disabled]
Audio Controller: [Disabled]

 Advanced\Peripheral configuration\ATA Controller config

S-ATA Interface: [Disabled]
Primary IDE Channel: [Enabled]
Secondary IDE Channel: [Enabled]

 Advanced\PCI Configuration
PCI IRQ Line 1: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 2: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 3: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 4: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 5: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 6: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 7: [Auto]
PCI IRQ Line 8: [Auto]

 Advanced \Advanced system configuration

PCI Bus Parity Checking: [Disabled]
Graphics aperture: [32M]
Extended memory [Auto]
BIOS Work Space Location: [Expansion ROM Area]
Discard Timer Mode: [1024 clocks]
SMART Device Monitoring: [Disabled]

 Advanced\System management
SM Fan Control: [Enhanced Cooling]
SM Error Halt: [Disabled]
Fan State:
CPU: OK
Auxiliary: None
Power supply: None
Thermal sensor state:
CPU: OK
System: OK
Battery State: OK

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 104 / 280

 Security
Setup Password Not Installed
System Password Not Installed
Set setup password: [Press Enter]
Setup Password Lock: [Standard]
Set System Password: [Press Enter]
System Password Mode: [System]
System Password Lock: [WOL Skip]
System Load: [Standard]
Setup Prompt: [Enabled]
Virus Warning: [Disabled]
Diskette write: [Enabled]
Flash Write: [Enabled]
MemoryBird SystemLock: [Disabled]
SmartCard SystemLock: [Disabled]

 Power
APM Interface: [Enabled]
APM Power Saving: [Disabled]
Standby Timeout: [Disabled]
Suspend Timeout: [Disabled]
Hard disk Timeout: [Disabled]
APM Resume Timer: [Disabled]
APM Resume Time: [00:00:00]
ACPI Save to RAM: [Enabled]
> Power On/Off

 Power\power ON-OFF
Power-on Source [BIOS Controlled]
LAN: [Enabled]
Wake Up Timer: [Disabled]
Wake Up Time: [00.00.00]
Wake Up Mode: [Daily]
Power-off Source:
Software: [Enabled]
Keyboard: [Disabled]
Power button: [Enabled]
LAN Wakeup Mode:
Monitor: [On]
Power Failure Recovery: [Always On]

 Exit
To save and exit from BIOS setup, select “Save Changes & Exit”.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 105 / 280

4.2.8 Digital Pro-face PS3650A-T41

Connect a USB keyboard to the PC, switch the power supply on and press the F2 key to enter the BIOS menu.

Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
Main Advanced Intel Security Boot Exit
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

IMPORTANT NOTE
These screenshot are applicable to panels PC model PS3650A-T41_0002 and to panel PC
model PS3650-T41 whose firmware has been updated.

IMPORTANT NOTE
For systems equipped with W29.2 or W29.3, if the Panel PC freezes during startup, disable
the parameter “Advanced\Legacy USB support”.
When this parameter is disabled it is not possible to boot the system by means of the
Recovery Disk, so it is necessary to enable it temporarily in order to use the Recovery Disk.

 Main
System Time: [15:19:49]
System Date: [03/20/2006]
> Primary Master: [HTS541040G9AT00–(PMI)]
> Primary Slave: [None]
System memory: 640 KB
Extended memory: 514048 KB

 Main\Primary Master
Primary Master: [HTS541040G9AT00–(PMI)]
Type: [Auto]
LBA Format
Total Sectors: 78140160
Maximum Capacity: 40008 MB
Multi-Sector Transfers: [16 Sectors]
LBA Model Control: [Enabled]
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled]
Transfer Mode: [FPIO 4 / DMA 2]
Ultra DMA Mode: [Mode 5]

 Main\Primary Slave
Primary Slave: [None]
Type: [Auto]

Multi-Sector Transfers: [Disabled]

LBA Model Control: [Disabled]
32 Bit I/O: [Disabled]
Transfer Mode: [Standard]
Ultra DMA Mode: [Disabled]
SMART Monitoring Disabled

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 106 / 280

 Advanced
Installed O/S: [Other]
Reset Configuration Data: [No]
Large Disk Access Mode: [DOS]
Local BUS IDE adapter: [Primary]
> Advanced Chipset Control
> I/O Device Configuration
> Keyboard Features
> Cache Memory
> PCI Configuration
> DMI Event Logging
Disable ACPI _Sx: [None]
Legacy USB support: [Enabled]
Enabled memory gap: [Disabled]
Summary Screen: [Enabled]
Quickboot Mode: [Enabled]
Extended Memory Testing: [Just zero it]
Show CMOS Checksum Error: [Disabled]
Power On Delay [Disabled]

 Advanced\Advanced Chipset Control

> DDR SDRAM Configuration

 Advanced\Advanced Chipset Control\DDR SDRAM Configuration

DDR Speed: DDR333
Active to Precharge delay: 7 Clocks
SDRAM CAS# Latency: 2.5
RAS# to CAS# Latency: 3 DDR SDRAM Clocks
RAS# Precharge: 3 DDR SDRAM Clocks

 Advanced\I/O Device Cpnfiguration

Onboard Serial Port 1: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [3f8]
Interrupt: [IRQ4]
Onboard Serial Port 2: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [2f8]
Interrupt: [IRQ3]

 Advanced\Keyboard Features
NumLock: [On]
Key Click: [Disabled]
Keyboard auto-repeat rate: [30/sec]
Keyboard auto-repeat delay: [1/2 sec]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 107 / 280

 Advanced\Cache Memory
Memory Cache: [Enabled]
Cache System BIOS area: [Write Protect]
Cache Video BIOS area: [Write Protect]
Cache Base 0-512k: [Write Back]
Cache Base 512-640k: [Write Back]
Cache Extended Memory Area: [Write Back]
Cache A000-AFFF: [Disabled]
Cache B000-BFFF: [Disabled]
Cache C800-CBFF: [Write Protect]
Cache CC00-CFFF: [Write Protect]
Cache D000-D3FF: [Disabled]
Cache D400-D7FF: [Disabled]
Cache D800-DBFF: [Disabled]
Cache DC00-DFFF: [Disabled]
Cache E000-E3FF: [Disabled]
Cache E400-E7FF: [Write Protect]
Cache E800-EBFF: [Write Protect]
Cache EC00-EFFF: [Write Protect]

 Advanced\PCI Configuration
> PCI/PNP ISA IRQ Resource Exclusion
PCI IRQ line 1 [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 2 [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 3 [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 4 [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 5 [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 6 [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 7 [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 8 [Auto Select]

 Advanced\PCI/PNP ISA IRQ Resource Exclusion

IRQ 3: [Available]
IRQ 4: [Available]
IRQ 5: [Available]
IRQ 7: [Available]
IRQ 10: [Available]
IRQ 11: [Available]

 Advanced\DMI Event Logging

Event log validity Valid
Event log capacity Space Available
View DMI event log [Enter]
Event Logging [Disabled]
ECC Event Logging [Disabled]
Mark DMI events as read [Enter]
Clear all DMI event logs [No]

 Intel
> CPU Control Sub-Menu
> MCH Control Sub-Menu
> Video (Intel IGD) Control Sub-Menu
> ICH Control Sub-Menu

> ACPI Control Sub-Menu

> APM Control Sub-Menu
> Workaround Control Sub-Menu

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 108 / 280

 Intel\CPU Control Sub-Menu

Processor Power Management: [Disabled]
Thermal Control Circuit: [TM1]

 Intel\MCH Control Sub-Menu

> MCH Power Management Sub-Menu
DDR ECC Operation: [Enabled]

 Intel\MCH Control Sub-Menu\MCH Power Management Sub-Menu

Chipset Thermal Throttling: [Enabled]
DPRM Support: [Enabled]

 Intel\Video (Intel IGD) Control Sub-Menu

IGD – Memory Size: [UMA = 8MB]

 Intel\ICH Control Sub-Menu

> Integrated Device Control Sub-Menu
CPU Sleep: [Disabled]
Deeper Sleep in S1M: [Disabled]
PCI Clock Run: [Disabled]

 Intel\ICH Control Sub-Menu\Integrated Device Control Sub-Menu

USB – Device 29, F1 Only: [Enabled]
USB – Device 29, Function 7: [Enabled]

IDE – Device 31, Function 1: [Enabled]

AC97A – Device 31, Function 5: [Disabled]

Onboard LAN1: [Enabled]

Onboard LAN2: [Enabled]
Onboard Cardbus Controller: [Enabled]

 Intel\ACPI Control Sub-Menu

APIC – IO APIC Mode: [Disabled]
HPET–High Performance Event Timer: [Disabled]

 Intel\APM Control Sub-Menu

Cx States: [Disabled]

 Intel\Workaround Control Sub-Menu

C3-APIC Workaround: [Disabled]

 Security
Supervisor Password is: Clear
User Password is: Clear
Set Supervisor Pawword: [Enter]
Set User Password: [Enter]
Fixed disk boot sector: [Normal]
Password on boot: [Disabled]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 109 / 280

 Boot
Boot Priority Order:
1: USB HDD
2: USB FDC
3: USB CDROM
4: IDE 0: Hitachi HTS541640J…
5: PCI LAN: Realtek Boot Agent
6: PCI LAN: Realtek Boot Agent
7:
8:
Excluded from boot order:
: IDE 1:
: Other USB:
: PCI SCSI:
: PCI:

 Exit
Exit Saving Changes
Exit Discarding Changes
Load Setup Defaults
Discard Changes
Save Changes

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 110 / 280

4.2.9 Siemens Simatic IPC577C

Connect the keyboard to the PC, switch the power supply on and press the F2 key to enter the BIOS menu.
Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
Main Advanced Security Boot Version Exit
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

 Main
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
System Time: [15:19:49]
System Date: [03/20/2006]

Serial ATA Port 0 [Not Installed]

> Serial ATA port 1 [P1- FUJITSU MHZ2080B]
Serial ATA Port 4 [Not Installed]
Serial ATA Port 5 [Not Installed]

> Boot Options:

> Keyboard Features
> Hardware Options

Cache RAM 1024 KB

Total Memory 1024 MB

 Main\Serial ATA Port 1

InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Serial ATA Port 1 [P1- FUJITSU MHZ2080B]

Tranfert Mode: <Ultra DMS ATA-100>

 Main\Boot options
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Boot options

Quick Boot Mode: <Enabled>

POST Errors: <All without keyboard>
Diagnostic Screen: <Enabled>

 Main\Keyboard Features
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Keyboard Features

NumLock: <On>

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 111 / 280

 Main\Hardware options
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Hardware Options

Onboard Ethernet 1: <Enabled>

Ethernet 1 Address: 00:0E:8C:A0:26:50
Ethernet 1 Remote Boot: <Disabled>

Onboard Ethernet 2: <Enabled>

Ethernet 2 Address: 00:0E:8C:A0:26:4F
Ethernet 2 Remote Boot: <Disabled>

Dual View DVI / CRT: <Disabled>

 Advanced
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Setup Warning:
Setting items on this screen to
incorrect values may cause your
system to malfunction!

> IO Device Configuration

> SATA Configuration

HPET - HPET Support: <Enabeld>

Legacy USB Support: <Enabled>

SafeCard Functions: <Enabled>

Fan control: <Enabled>

 Advanced\IO Device Configuration

InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
IO Device Configuration

Internal COM 1: <Auto>

 Advanced\SATA Configuration
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
SATA Configuration

SATA Controller: <Enabled>

SATA Controller Mode: <Enhanced>

 Security
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Supervisor Password: Not Installed
User Password: Not Installed

Set Supervisor Password

Set User Password

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 112 / 280

 Boot
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Boot Device Priority

> Legacy Boot Devices

> EFI Boot Devices

 Boot\Legacy Boot Type Order

InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Legacy Boot Type Order

Boot Menu <Normal>

> Boot Type Order

> Hard Disk Drive

 Boot\Legacy Boot Type Order\Boot Type Order

InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Boot Type Order

Hard Disk Drive

Others
Floppy Drive
CD/DVD-ROM Drive

 Boot\Legacy Boot Type Order\Boot Type Order\Hard Disk Drive

InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Hard Disk Drive

P1- FUJITSU MHZ2080BH G2

 Boot\EFI Boot Device

InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
EFI Boot Type Order

 Version
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
SIMATIC HMI IPC577C

BIOS Version V12.01.02

BIOS Number A5E02316088-ES002
InsydeH20 Version Montevina.03.56.37.2049

FPGA Revision ID 14

Processor Type Intel(R) Celeron(R) M CPU 722 @

1.20GHz

CPU ID 0676
Code Revision 0C

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 113 / 280

 Exit
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 3.5
Exit Saving Changes
Exit Discharding Changes
Load Setup Defaults
Discard Changes
Save Changes

Profile: <Standard>

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 114 / 280

4.2.10 Digital Proface Pro-face APL3000-BA-CD2G-2P-1G-NO250

Connect the keyboard to the PC, switch the power supply on and press the F2 key to enter the BIOS menu.
Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Embedded.1
Copyright 1985-2005 Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
All Rights Reserved

======================================================
PL-3000 Series: BIOS Version 1.03 07/23/2010
======================================================
CPU = 1 Processors Detected, Cores per Processor = 2
Intel(R) Core(TM) Duo CPU T2500 @ 2.00GHz
1015M System RAM Passed
2048 KB L2 Cache
System BIOS shadowed
Video BIOS shadowed
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

 Main
Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
System Time: [15:19:49]
System Date: [03/20/2006]

> IDE Channel 0 Mster [None]

> IDE Channel 0 Slave [None]
> SATA Port 0 [Hitachi HTE545025B9A3-(S0)]
> SATA Port 1 [None]

System Memory 640 KB

Extended Memory 1038336 KB

 Advanced
Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
> Processor configuration
> Power-ON configuration
> Video (Intel IGD) configuration
> Cache memory configuration
> Integrated Devide configuration
> DMI Event Logging
> Soft Mirror status

Installed OS: [Other]

Reset configuration data: [No]
Large Disk Access Mode: [DOS]
Local Bus IDE Adapter [Enabled]
RAS Reset Port Mask: [Disabled]
Show CMOS Error : [Disabled]
Summary Screen: [Disabled]
Enable Memory Gap: [Disabled]
Extended Memory Testing: [Just Zero it]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 115 / 280

 Advanced\Processor Configuration
Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
> CPU Thermal configuration

Core Multi-processing: [Enabled]

No execute Mode Mem Protection: [Enabled]
Inter® Virtualization Technology: [Disabled]
Set Max Ext CPUID=3: [Disabled]

 Advanced\Processor Configuration\CPU Thermal configuration

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
Thermal control Circuit: [TM1]
PROCHOT# Enable: [Enabled]

 Advanced\Power-ON configuration
Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
Power-ON Delay: [Disabled]
Restore Main Power: [Power ON]
Power On Beep: [Enabled]

 Advanced\Video (Intel IGD) Configuration

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
IGD #0: [Auto]
IGD #1: [Auto]
DVMT 3.0 Mode: [Fixed]
Pre-Allocated Memory Size : [8MB]
Total Graphics Memory: [64MB]
DVMT Graphics Memory: 120MB

 Advanced\Cache Memory Configuration

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
Memory Cache: [Enabled]
Cache System BIOS area: [Write Protected]
Cache Video BIOS area: [Write Protected]
Cache Base 0-512K: [Write Back]
Cache Base 512-640K: [Write Back]
Cache Extended Memory Area: [Write Back]
Cache A000-AFFF: [Disabled]
Cache B000-BFFF: [Disabled]
Cache C800-CBFF [Write Protected]
Cache CC00-CFFF [Write Protected]
Cache D000-D3FF [Disabled]
Cache D400-D700 [Disabled]
Cache D800-DBFF [Disabled]
Cache DC00-DFFF [Disabled]
Cache E000-E3FF: [Write Protected]
Cache E400-E7FF: [Write Protected]
Cache E800-EBFF: [Write Protected]
Cache EC00-EFFF: [Write Protected]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 116 / 280

 Advanced\Integrated Device Configuration

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
> I/O Device Configuration
> PCI Configuration
> USB Controller configuration

SATA Operation Mode: [Compatible]

ComINIT OOB-sequence issue: [Enabled]

LAN contrioller 1: [Enabled]

LAN Controller 2: [Enabled]
Hig definition audio(Azalia) [Auto]

 Advanced\ Integrated Device Configuration\I/O Device Configuration

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
COM Port 1: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [3F8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 4]

COM Port 2: [Enabled]

Base I/O address: [2F8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 3]

COM Port 3: [Enabled]

Base I/O address: [3E8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 11]

COM Port 4: [Enabled]

Base I/O address: [2E8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 10]

 Advanced\ Integrated Device Configuration\PCI Configuration

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
> PCI/PNP ISA IRQ Resource Exclusion

PCI IRQ line 1: [Auto Select]

PCI IRQ line 2: [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 3: [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 4: [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 5: [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 6: [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 7: [Auto Select]
PCI IRQ line 8: [Auto Select]

 Advanced\ Integrated Device Configuration\PCI Configuration\PCI/PNP ISA IRQ Resource Exclusion

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
IRQ 3: [Available]
IRQ 4: [Available]
IRQ 5: [Available]
IRQ 7: [Available]
IRQ 10: [Available]
IRQ 11: [Available]
IRQ 15: [Available]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 117 / 280

 Advanced\ Integrated Device Configuration\USB Controller configuration

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
USB Controller #0: Enabled
USB Controller #1: [Enabled]
USB Controller #2: [Enabled]
USB Controller #3: [Enabled]

USB 2.0 controller: [Enabled]

 Advanced\DMI Event Logging

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
Event log validity: Valid
Event log capability: Space available

View DMI event log: [Enter]

Event Logging: [Enabled]

ECC Event Logging: [Enabled]

Mark DMI events as read: [Enter]

Clear all DMI event loops: [No]

 Advanced\Soft Mirror Status

Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
Mirror System: Unknown
Active Disk: Unknown

Clear Mirror System: [No]

 Security
Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
Supervisor password Is: Clear
User Password Is: Clear

Set Supervisor Password [Enter]

Set User Password: [Enter]

Password on boot: Disabled

Fixed disk boot sector: [Normal]

 Boot
Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
Boot priority order:
1: STOR DEV:
2: SOFT MIRROR:
3: STOR. DEV: Hitachi HTE545025B9A3-(S0)
4: STOR. DEV:
5: IDE CD/DVD:
6: USB DE/DVD
7: USB FDC :
8: USB STOR :

Excluded from boot order

: STOR DEV:
: STOR DEV:
: PXE ROM: IBA GE Slot 0200 v1260
: PXE ROM: IBA GE Slot 0840 v4121
: PCI:

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 118 / 280

 Exit
Phoenix TrustedCore(tm) Setup Utility
Exit Saving Changes
Exit Discarding Changes
Load Setup Defaults
Discard changes
Save Changes

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 119 / 280

4.2.11 B&R APC 810

Connect the keyboard to the PC, switch the power supply on and press the DEL key to enter the BIOS menu.
Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

 Main
System Time: [15:19:49]
System Date: [03/20/2006]

 Advanced
> ACPI Configuration
> PCI Configuration
> PCI Express Configuration
> Graphics Configuration
> CPU Configuration
> Chipset Configuration
> I/O Interface Configuration
> Clock Configuration
> IDE Configuration
> USB Configuration
> Keyboard/Mouse Configuration
> Remote Access Configuration
> CPU Board Monitor
> Baseboard/Panel Features

 Advanced\ACPI Configuration
ACPI Aware O/S [Yes]

ACPI Version Features [ACPI v2.0]

ACPI APIC support [Enabled]
Suspend mode [S1 (POS)]
USB Device Wakeup from S3/S4 [Disabled]

Active Cooling Trip Point [Disabled]

Passive Cooling Trip Point [Disabled]
Critical Trip Point [105°C]

 Advanced\PCI Configuration
Plug & Play O/S [Yes]
PCI Latency Timer [64]
Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes]
Allocate IRQ to SMBUS HC [Yes]
Allocate IRQ to PCIEX2 [Yes]

> PCI IRQ Resource Exclusion

> PCI Interrupt Routing

 Advanced\PCI Configuration\PCI IRQ Resource Exclusion

IRQ6 [Available]
IRQ7 [Available]
IRQ10 [Available]
IRQ11 [Available]
IRQ12 [Available]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 120 / 280

 Advanced\PCI Configuration\PCI Interrupt Routing

A (VGA,PCIEX0,ETH2,UHCI2,HDA) [Auto]
B (AC97,PCIEX1,ETH1) [11]
C (PCIEX2) [Auto]
D (SATA,UHCI1,SMB,PCIEX3) [Auto]
E (INTD,PATA,UHCI3) [Auto]
F (INTA) [Auto]
G (INTB) [Auto]
H (INTC,UHCI0,EHCI) [Auto]

1st Exclusive PCI IRQ [11]

 Advanced\PCI Configuration
Active State Power-Management [Disabled]
PCIE Port 0 [Auto]
PCIE Port 1 [Auto]
PCIE Port 2 [Auto]
PCIE Port 3 [Auto]
PCIE Port 4 (ETH2) [Auto]
PCIE Port 5 (ETH1) [Auto]
PCIE High Priority Port [Disabled]

Res. PCIE Hotplug Resources [No]

PCIE Port 0 IOxAPIC Enabled [Disabled]

PCIE Port 1 IOxAPIC Enabled [Disabled]
PCIE Port 2 IOxAPIC Enabled [Disabled]
PCIE Port 3 IOxAPIC Enabled [Disabled]

 Advanced\Graphics Configuration
Primary Video Device [Internal VGA]

Internal Graphics Mode Select [Enabled, 8MB]

DVMT Mode Select [DVMT Mode]
DVMT/FIXED Memory [128MB]

Boot Display Device [Auto]

Boot Display Preference [SDVO-B SDVO-C LFP]
Local Flat Panel Type [SVGA 1x18 (004h) ]
Local Flat Panel Scaling [Centering ]

SVDO Port B Device [DVI]

SVDO Port C Device [DVI]

SVDO/DVI Hotplug Support [Enabled]

Display Mode Persistence [Enabled]

 Advanced\ CPU Configuration

MPS Revision [1.4]

Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled]

Execute-Disable Bit Capability [Enabled]
Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled]
Intel® SpeedStep™ tech [Enabled]
Intel® C-STATE tech [Disabled]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 121 / 280

 Advanced\ Chipset Configuration

DRAM Frequency [Auto]
DRAM Refresh Rate [Auto]
Memory Hole [Disabled]
DIMM Thermal Control [Disabled]
DT in SPD [Disabled]
TS on DIMM [Disabled]

 Advanced\ I/O Interface Configuration

Onboard Audio Controller [AC97 ]

 Advanced\ Clock Configuration

Spread Spectrum [Disabled]

 Advanced\IDE Configuration
ATA/IDE Configuration [Compatible]
Legacy IDE Channels [SATA Pri, PATA Sec]

Primary IDE Master [Hard Disk]

Primary IDE Slave [Not Detected]
Secondary IDE Master [Not Detected]
Secondary IDE Slave [Not Detected]

Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled]

IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35]
ATA(PI) 80Pin Cable Detection [Host & Device]

 Advanced\USB Configuration
USB Functions [8 USB Ports]
USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled]

Legacy USB Support [Enabled]

USB Legacy POST-Always [Enabled]
USB Keyboard Legacy Support [Enabled]
USB Mouse Legacy Support [Disabled]
USB Storage Device Support [Enabled]
Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled]
USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed]
BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled]
USB Beep Message [Enabled]
USB Stick Default Emulation [Hard Disk]
USB Mass Storage Reset Delay [20 Sec]
Special Delay for USB HDDs [Disabled]

 Advanced\Keyboard/Mouse Configuration
Bootup Num-Lock [On]
Typematic Rate [Fast]

 Advanced\Remote Access Configuration

Remote Access [Disabled]
Serial Port BIOS Update [Disabled]

 Advanced\CPU Board Monitor

H/W Health Function [Enabled]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 122 / 280

 Advanced\Baseboard/Panel Features
> Panel Control
> Baseboard Monitor
> Legacy Devices

 Advanced\Baseboard/Panel Features\Panel Control

Select Panel Number [0]
Brightness [100%]

 Advanced\Baseboard/Panel Features\Legacy Devices

COM A: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [3F8]
Interrupt: IRQ 4
COM B: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [2F8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 3]
COM C: [Enabled]
Base I/O address: [3E8]
Interrupt: [IRQ 5]
COM D: [Disabled]
COM E: [Disabled]
CAN: [Disabled]

Hardware Security Key: [Enabled]

Base I/O address: [378]

ETH2 LAN controller: [Enabled]

 Boot
Boot Priority Selection [Type Based]

1st Boot Device [USB Removable Device]

2nd Boot Device [USB Harddisk]
3rd Boot Device [USB Floppy]
4th Boot Device [Primary Master]
5th Boot Device [Primary Slave]
6th Boot Device [USB CDROM]
7th Boot Device [Secondary Master]
8th Boot Device [Secondary Slave]

Quick Boot [Enabled]

Quiet Boot [Disabled]
Automatic Boot List Retry [Disabled]
AddOn ROM Display Mode [Keep Current]
Halt On Error [Disabled]
Hit ‘DEL’ Message Display [Enabled]
Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled]
PXE Boot to LAN (ETH1) [Disabled]
Slide-In 2 Option-ROM [Disabled]
Power Loss Control [Turn On]

 Security
Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled]
HDD Security Freeze Lock [Enabled]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 123 / 280

 Power
Power Management/APM [Enabled]
Suspend Time Out [Disabled]
Video Power Down Mode [Suspend]
Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend]
Keyboard & PS/2 Mouse [MONITOR]
FDC/LPT/COM Ports [MONITOR]
Primary Master IDE [MONITOR]
Primary Slave IDE [MONITOR]
Secondary Master IDE [MONITOR]
Secondary Slave IDE [MONITOR]

Resume On Ring [Disabled]

Resume On PME# [Disabled]
Resume On RTC Alarm [Disabled]

Power Button Mode [On/Off]

 Exit
Save Changes and Exit
Discard Changes and Exit
Discard Changes

Load CMOS Defaults

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 124 / 280

4.2.12 Allen Bradley 1500P Ser.F

Connect the USB keyboard to the PC, switch the power supply on and press the F2 key to enter in the BIOS
menu.

IMPORTANT NOTE
USB port on the front is not managed because not supported by RTOS version 5.5.1.

Select each one of the BIOS menu and sub-menu selections and check out the correct parameter settings.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from a new system, with factory default settings, set those parameters that are
highlighted in bold-italic type, as shown in the following tables.

Firmware Update
Firmware Configuration
Diagnostic
AMI Rescue
Hardware History
Exit

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 125 / 280

 Firmware Configuration
Main
Advanced
Chipset
Boot
Security
Save & Exit

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 126 / 280

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced

Enable PXE Boot [Disabled]
PCI Subsystem Settings
ACPI Settings
CPU Configuration
SATA Configuration
USB Configuration
Power Configuration
Intel® Rapid Start Technology
Super IO Configuration
Hardware Monitor

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ PCI Subsystem Settings

PERR# Generation [Disabled]
SERR# Generation [Disabled]

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ ACPI Settings

ACPI Sleep State [S3 (suspended to RAM)]

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ CPU Configuration

Hyper-threading [Enabled]
Intel Virtualization Technology [Disabled]

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ SATA Configuration

SATA Mode Selection [IDE]

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ USB Configuration

USB Port #0 [Enabled]
USB Port #1 [Enabled]
USB Port #2 [Enabled]
USB Port #3 [Enabled]

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 127 / 280

USB Port #4 [Enabled]

USB Port #5 [Enabled]

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ Power Configuration

Restore AC Power Loss [Power On]

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ Intel ® Rapid Start Technology

Intel ® Rapid Start Technology [Disabled]

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ Super IO Configuration

Serial Port 1 Configuration
Serial Port 2 Configuration

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ Super IO Configuration \ Serial Port 1 Configuration

Serial Port [Enabled]
Change Settings [Auto]

 Firmware Configuration \ Advanced \ Super IO Configuration \ Serial Port 2 Configuration

Serial Port [Enabled]
Change Settings [Auto]

 Firmware Configuration
Main
Advanced
Chipset
Boot
Security
Save & Exit

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 128 / 280

 Firmware Configuration \ Boot

Bootup NumLock State [On]
Quiet Boot [Disabled]
Boot Priority List
USB Boot Priority
Hard-Drive Boot Priority

 Firmware Configuration \ Boot \ Boot Priority List

Select the USB Recovery Disk and press “+” button in order to bring the voice on top.

 Firmware Configuration
Main
Advanced
Chipset
Boot
Security
Save & Exit

 Firmware Configuration \ Save & Exit

Save Changes and Reset [Yes]
Discard Changes and Reset
Restore Default

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 129 / 280

4.3 STEP 2 - SW INSTALLATION BY RECOVERY DISK

The RECOVERY DISK is an autobooting floppy tool for completely installing a new Thema4 system,
updating an existing system or executing a few special operations.

The RECOVERY DISK MENU is displayed in the following table:

N. Function Sub-function
1 Software installation 1.1 Install
2 Software update 2.1 PCS installation
2.2 P/G installation
2.3 FECP installation
2.4 GUI installation
2.5 JWORKS installation
2.6 VXWORKS installation
2.7 BOOTROM installation
3 Authorization management
4 Backup
5 Archive management
6 System tuning
7 Move archives
8 Exit
Table 5 - Recovery disk menu
WARNING!!
Performing an installation over an already installed system causes the loss of every data
installed or archived on the machine. To update an existing system use the Software update
menu item of RECOVERY DISK or Software installation & update item in CONFIGURATION
MENU.

REFERENCE
To find information specific to the usage of RECOVERY DISK please refer to section 6.

The Thema4 system software can be installed in the following ways:

 by means of a set of floppy disks (installation from floppy)
 by means of the Ethernet network through an FTP protocol (installation from network).
 by means of USB key, USB CD drive or USB floppy disk.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 130 / 280

4.3.1 Installation from floppy

To install a new system by floppy the following disks are needed:
disk number content
AUTHORIZATION 1 configuration informations for the specific sterilizer
BOOTROM 1 bootrom related to the O.S.Driver software configuration Px, Sx or Ax
VXWORKS N operative system related to the O.S.Driver software configuration Px, Sx or Ax
FECP 1 communication protocol related to the application software configuration Wx
PCS N process control software related to the application software configuration Wx
GUI N graphical user interface related to the application software configuration Wx
JWORKS N Java Virtual Machine related to the application software configuration Wx
PGLIB 1 P/G library related to the library configuration Kx

These disks can be provided directly as floppies for older systems or as a CD for newer systems.

REFERENCE
To create floppies from CD see the procedure described in section 7.4

To install a system with floppies apply the following procedure:

1. Start the system using the RECOVERY DISK
2. Insert the IP address required
3. Select the item Software installation
4. Fill the form with information required
5. Select the operation Install
6. Select the operation Install from floppy
7. The following operations will be performed:
7.1 Hard disk formatting and partitioning
7.2 Bootrom installation
7.3 Authorization installation
7.4 Profibus configuration installation
7.5 VXWORKS installation
7.6 PCS installation
7.7 FECP installation
7.8 JWORKS installation
7.9 GUI installation
7.10 PGLIB installation
The system will ask to insert the right floppy needed for each operation and will require to press a
keyboard key to continue operation.

NOTE
When installing a non primary Panel PC steps 7.3, 7.4, 7.6, 7.7 and 7.10 will be skipped.

REFERENCE
If the installation completes successfully, the PC must be configured from the Thema4 system
CONFIGURATION MENU: see STEP3.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 131 / 280

4.3.2 Installation from network

To install a new system by network the machine CD is needed: it contains all the software needed and some
files specific of the machine being installed.
An host computer must be used. It has to be connected to the Panel PC by an Ethernet cable and an FTP server
must run on it. The FTP server needs to be configured to redirect an FTP login, to access the local CDROM
drive (for example D:\).

REFERENCE
For more detailed information about connecting Thema4 through the network please refer to section
6.
For more detailed information about configuring the FTP server please refer to section 7.

To install a system with network apply the following procedure:

1. Start the host PC and run the FTP server
2. Verify that the FTP server is properly configured
3. Insert the right CD in the CD-Rom drive of the host PC
4. Start the system using the RECOVERY DISK
5. Insert the IP address required. It must be selected in a way that allows the connection to the host PC.
6. Select the item Software Installation
7. Fill the form with information required
8. Select the operation Install
9. Select the operation Install from network
10. The system will ask to insert connection parameters of the host PC such as: IP address, FTP user
name, FTP password
11. The following operations will be performed:
11.1 Hard disk formatting and partitioning
11.2 Bootrom installation
11.3 Authorization installation
11.4 Profibus configuration installation
11.5 VXWORKS installation
11.6 PCS installation
11.7 FECP installation
11.8 JWORKS installation
11.9 GUI installation
11.10 PGLIB installation

NOTE
When installing a non primary Panel PC steps 11.3, 11.4, 11.6, 11.7 and 11.10 will be skipped.

REFERENCE
If the installation completes successfully, the PC must be configured from the Thema4 system
CONFIGURATION MENU: see section 5.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 132 / 280

4.3.3 Installation from USB device

It is possible to perform a USB installation by means of devices such as USB keys, USB external CD drives or
USB external floppy drives.
Before attempting a USB installation please check that USB is enabled at BIOS level in the Panel PC.

4.3.3.1 USB key installation

To install the software by means of a USB key, the machine CD is needed at first: it contains all the software
needed and some files specific of the machine being installed.
By means of a computer that supports USB and that has a CD drive, copy the content of the machine CD in the
USB key. The USB key must be large enough to host entirely the installation software (a 32 Mb key could be
enough).
REFERENCE
For more detailed information about transferring the software on a USB key please refer to section
7.4

To install the system with USB key apply the following procedure:
1. Transfer the content of the CD in the USB key
2. Start the system using the RECOVERY DISK
3. Insert the IP address required.
4. Select the item Software Istallation
5. Fill the form with information required
6. Select the operation Instal
7. Plug the USB key in an USB connector, the item Install from USB key will come up in a few.
8. Select the operation Install from USB key
9. The following operation will be performed
9.1 Hard disk formatting and partitioning
9.2 Bootrom installation
9.3 Authorization installation
9.4 Profibus configuration installation
9.5 VXWORKS installation
9.6 PCS installation
9.7 FECP installation
9.8 JWORKS installation
9.9 GUI installation
9.10 PGLIB installation

NOTE
When installing a non primary Panel PC steps 9.3, 9.4, 9.6, 9.7 and 9.10 will be skipped. At the end
you can unplug the USB key.

REFERENCE
If the installation completes successfully, the PC must be configured from the Thema4 system
CONFIGURATION MENU: see STEP3.

4.3.3.2 USB external CD drive installation

Exactly as for Floppy Installation the entire set of floppy disk must be created from the machine CD. Then the
steps required to install from USB external floppy are nearly identical to steps required to install from internal
floppy drive.
To install the system with external CD drive apply the following procedure:
1. Start the system using the RECOVERY DISK
2. Insert the IP address required
3. Select the item Software Istallation
4. Fill the form with information required
5. Select the operation Instal
6. Plug the USB external CD in an USB connector and insert the installation CD. Wait about 30 seconds to
allow the item Install from USB ext.CD to come up. Depending from CD drive models some extra time
may be needed to read the Table Of Contentents of the CD and for the device to be ready.
7. Select the operation Install from USB ext.CD
8. The following operations will be performed:

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 133 / 280

8.1 Hard disk formatting and partitioning

8.2 Bootrom installation
8.3 Authorization installation
8.4 Profibus configuration installation
8.5 VXWORKS installation
8.6 PCS installation
8.7 FECP installation
8.8 JWORKS installation
8.9 GUI installation
8.10 PGLIB installation

NOTE
When installing a non primary Panel PC steps 8.3, 8.4, 8.6, 8.7 and 8.10 will be skipped. At the end
you can unplug the USB key.

REFERENCE
If the installation completes successfully, the PC must be configured from the Thema4 system
CONFIGURATION MENU: see STEP3.

4.3.3.3 USB external floppy drive installation

To install the software by means of an external USB CD drive the machine CD is needed at first: it contains all
the software needed and some files specific of the machine being installed.
To install a system with USB external floppy drive apply the following procedure:
1. Start the system using the RECOVERY DISK
2. Insert the IP address required
3. Select the item Software installation
4. Fill the form with information required
5. Select the operation Install
6. Plug the USB external floppy drive in the USB connector. Within a few seconds the item Install from
USB floppy will display.
7. Select the operation Install from USB floppy
8. The following operation will be performed
8.1 Hard disk formatting and partitioning
8.2 Bootrom installation
8.3 Authorization installation
8.4 Profibus configuration installation
8.5 VXWORKS installation
8.6 PCS installation
8.7 FECP installation
8.8 JWORKS installation
8.9 GUI installation
8.10 PGLIB installation
The system will ask to insert the right floppy needed for each operation and will require to press ant
keyboard key to continue operation

NOTE
When installing a non primary Panel PC steps 8.3, 8.4, 8.6, 8.7 and 8.10 will be skipped. At the end
you can unplug the USB key.

REFERENCE
If the installation completes successfully, the PC must be configured from the Thema4 system
CONFIGURATION MENU: see STEP3.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 134 / 280

4.4 STEP 3 - PC CONFIGURATION BY “CONFIGURATION MENU“

If the installation completes successfully, in order to complete the Thema4 system preparation, restart the PC
and enter into configuration menu using the startup UserID and Password and perform the following operations:
 Step 3.1 - Manuals/Help on line installation & update
 Step 3.2 - Touch screen calibration
 Step 3.3 - Profibus Card configuration (only for primary PC)

IMPORTANT NOTE
When configuring a PC that is not primary, so for side 2 or 3, the download of the
Manuals/Help on line must be done from the primary PC and with the non primary PC
connected to the primary PC (Step 3.1).

IMPORTANT NOTE
When configuring a primary PC the Configuration Menu item Profibus Card configuration
must be used to download the profibus card configuration into the flash memory (Step 3.3).

REFERENCE
For more detailed information on these steps, please refer to CONFIGURATION MENU in section 5.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 135 / 280

4.5 STEP 4 - SOFTWARE VERSIONS IDENTIFICATION

To perform the verification of Thema4 installed software versions:

 Switch-on the Panel-PC and wait until the application program Thema4 is launched and the Log-in
screen is shown.
 Then touch the screen and insert the default UserID “SUP” and Password “1111” or any valid login.
 Press the OK Login button to pass to the application program menu.
 Verify in the “Setup&configuration” menu the correctness of the following data

1. In the function “Factory parameter summary”, the “Factory number”.

2. In the function “Software versions”, the software versions of the Thema4 programs, listed in the
following table.

N° Software program Name Version Subversion

1 Process Control System T4PCS xxy z
2 Phase Groups Library T4LIB xxy z
3 Graphic User Interface T4GUI xxy z
4 Fedegari External Comunication Protocol T4FECP xxy z
5 Operative System T4OS xxz z
6 Fedegari Bootrom Procedure T4ROM xxz z
7 JWorks - w.x.y z

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 136 / 280

4.6 STEP 5 - Pt100/4-20mA CONVERTER CONFIGURATION

To execute the configuration of Pt100/4-20mA converter transmitter INOR IPAQ-Lor IPAQ-L PLUS, the following
items are necessary :
 Configuration program “INOR–IPRO software” version 3.07 or later, with a “special” serial cable (the
cables for IPAQ-L and IPAQ-L PLUS are different).
 Thema4 configuration file to be downloaded, provided by Fedegari.

NOTE
For communication between IPAQ and PC, use the INOR IPRO cable ATEX certified version,
provided with the “INOR–IPRO” software.

4.6.1 INOR IPAQ-L/L+ transmitter

Figure 54 – IPAQ-L/L+ wiring diagram

NOTE
The transmitter is polarity protected and will not be damaged by connecting the power supply with
the wrong polarity, but the output will be 0 mA.

4.6.1.1 INOR IPAQ-L/L+ configuration procedure by INOR IPRO software

The transmitter is configured from a standard PC (IBM compatible) by using INOR-IPRO software.
Download the “Thema4 configuration file” into the transmitter PC connector, as follows:
 Power the IPAQ transmitter before you start to configure the transmitter.
 Connect the transmitter to your PC.
 Start the IPRO application on your PC.
 Open the menu Miscellaneous-Settings : set the correct serial port, the correct main power frequency,
the IPTS68 temperature standard, °C temperature unit and Meter dimension unit. Confirm with the OK
button.
 Open the specific configuration file with INO extension for IPAQ-L or IPAQ-L+.
 Use the specific button to transfer the file data into the transmitter.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 137 / 280

4.7 STEP 6 – MODULES/EQUIPMENTS CONFIGURATION BY GUI

The control system is connected to the field by means of decentralized peripherals wired through a Profibus bus.
Each peripheral is a Profibus node, even the controller which is the zero node.
At the moment the following kind of decentralized peripheral are supported by the control system:
 Siemens ET200S
 Siemens ET200M (supported but not used)
 Allen Bradley FlexI/O
 Allen Bradley Point/O
 SMC EX250
 SMC EX500
 Siemens DP/DP Coupler
 B&R X20+X67
 SEW MOVIMOT
 Kawasaki ROBOT
 Siemens Safety PLC
 Heidenhain Encoder

Each node is named “equipment” and, generally, each equipment is composed by modules.
To enable the control system to know how the field is composed it is necessary to provide an equivalent
representation of equipments connected to the Profibus bus. This can be done in the area HW physical view in
Setup & Configuration.
Following sections explain details about configuring each kind of decentralized peripheral through some
examples.

4.7.1 General information

The generic Profibus network is composed by some equipments, each one composed by its modules.

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5

node 1 node 2
1. POWER SUPPLY 1. POWER SUPPLY
2. IM153 2. IM153
3. 32 DI 3. 16 DI
4. 32 DO 4. 16 DO
5. 8AI 5. 8AI
6. 4AO

Figure 55 – Generic Profibus network

The equipment named “node 1” has address 1, the one named “node 2” has address 2. In the following sections
will be showed how to set Profibus address for each kind of equipment.

The equivalent representation in the area HW physical view assumes that the position of the equipment be the
same as the Profibus address; therefore in the first position must be described the equipment with address 1, in
position 2 must be described the equipment with address 2.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 138 / 280

NOTE
It is possible to insert up to 10 equipments with no more than 40 modules each.

Follows the equivalent GUI representation of the example above:

COM 32DI 32DO 8AI 4AO

COM 16DI 16DO 8AI

It is not necessary that the network layout matches the logic representation. Therefore the Panel PC can
be any of the network nodes and the first equipment can be placed in a node network different from the first. The
position is identified by the node address. The following example is the same as the previous one.

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5

node 1 node 2

The first and last nodes of the Profibus chain must be terminated with the terminating resistance; this is
generally achieved setting the switch integrated in the plug in the ON position.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 139 / 280

4.7.2 Siemens ET200M

The following picture shows an example based on a single ET200M node; in case the network is composed of
other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

1 2 3 4 5 6 The equipment is composed of:

1. POWER SUPPLY
2. IM153
3. 32 DI
4. 32 DO
5. 8AI
6. 4AO

Figure 56 – ET200M Profibus network example

The equivalent representation in the area HW physical view is:

COM 32DI 32DO 8AI 4AO

NOTE
Please note that the power supply modules must not be inserted in the configuration.

The address can be set in the IM153 module using DP switches as follows. The address equals the sum of
numbers at the right of DIP switches in ON position.

Figure 57 – ET200M bus address setting

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 140 / 280

4.7.3 Siemens ET200S

The following picture shows an example based on a single ET200S node; in case the network is composed of
other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

The equipment is composed of:

1. IM151
2. PM-E
3. 4DI
4. 4 DO
5. 2AI
6. terminating module

1 2 3 4 56

Figure 58 – ET200S Profibus network example

The equivalent representation in the area HW physical view is:

COM 4DI 4DO 2AI

NOTE
Please note that PM-E and terminating modules must not be inserted in the configuration.

The address can be set in the IM151 module using DP switches as follows. The address equals the sum of
numbers at the right of DIP switches in ON position.

Figure 59 – ET200S bus address setting

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 141 / 280

4.7.4 Allen Bradley Flex I/O

The following picture shows an example based on a single FlexI/O node; in case the network is composed of
other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

1 2 3 4 5 The equipment is composed of:

1. 1794-APB
2. 1794-IB32
3. 1794-OB32P
4. 1794-4AI
5. 1794-2AI/2AO

Figure 60 – FlexI/O Profibus network example

The equivalent representation in the area HW physical view is:

COM 32DI 32DO 4AI 2AI/

2AO

It is possible for a single equipment to be composed by two rows connected by means of a special connection
cable. In this case the equipment is just a single node. Attention must be paid when inserting in the configuration
modules placed in the second row because insertion order is swapped.

1 2 3 4 5 The first equipment row is

composed of:
1. 1794-APB
2. 1794-IB32
3. 1794-OB32P
4. 1794-4AI
5. 1794-2AI/2AO

The second equipment row

is composed of:
1. 1794-IB32
2. 1794-IB16
3. 1794-OB32P
4. 1794-OB16P
1 2 3 4

Figure 61 – FlexI/O Profibus extended network example

The equivalent representation in the area HW physical view is:

COM 32DI 32DO 4AI 2AI/ 32DI 16DI 32DO 16DO

2AO

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 142 / 280

The address can be set in the APB module using contraves as follows : press button + to increase the cipher
and press button – to decrement it. It is possible to set addresses from 01 to 99.

Figure 62 – FlexI/O bus address setting

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 143 / 280

4.7.5 Allen Bradley POINT I/O

The following picture shows an example based on a single PointI/O node; in case the network is composed of
other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

1 2 3 4 5
The equipment is composed of:
6. 1734-APB
7. 1734-IB8
8. 1734-OB8E
9. 1734-IE2C
10. 1734-OE2C

Figure 63 – PointI/O Profibus network example

The equivalent representation in the area HW physical view is:

COM 8DI 8DO 2AI 2AO

The address can be set in the APB module using contraves as follows : press button + to increase the cipher
and press button – to decrement it. It is possible to set addresses from 01 to 99.

Figure 64 – PointI/O bus address setting

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 144 / 280

4.7.6 SMC EX250

The following picture shows an example based on a single EX250 node; in case the network is composed of
other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

The equipment is composed

by:
1. n INPUT modules
2. EX250 SI
3. n OUTPUT modules
1 2 3

Figure 65 – EX250 Profibus network example

Regardless of the number of output modules and the number of input modules installed the equivalent
representation in the area HW physical view is:

COM 32DI 32DO

IMPORTANT NOTE
Always to include the 32DI module even if no input module is installed. Otherwise loss of
Profibus connection will not be detected.

The address can be set in the EX250-SI module using selectors under the cover. Open the cover, set the DIP
switch in the HW position. By means of the two rotating selectors it is possible to set the address from 01 to 99.

Figure 66 – EX250 bus address setting

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 145 / 280

4.7.7 SMC EX500

The following picture shows an example based on a single EX500 node; in case the network is composed of
other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

The equipment is composed

of:
1. gateway
1 3a 3b 2. branch A with
a. outputs
b. inputs
3. branch B with
a. outputs
b. inputs
2a 2b

Figure 67 – EX500 Profibus network example

Regardless of the number of output modules and the number of input modules installed the equivalent
representation in the area HW physical view is:

COM 16DI 16DO 16DI 16DO

ATTENTION: always include at least a 16DI module even if no input module is installed. Otherwise loss
of Profibus connection will not be detected.

The representation above is the one suggested but it is not the only one valid. It is possible to get a valid
configuration sorting input and output modules in different ways or including modules of branches not installed:

COM 16DI 16DI 16DO 16DO

all the same

COM 16DO 16DI 16DI 16DO

COM 16DI 16DO 16DI 16DO 16DI 16DO 16DI 16DO

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 146 / 280

It is important to remember that each branch is equivalent to a 16DI and a 16DO module. If in the first branch, for
example, just 10 inputs are installed, the first input of the second branch will be placed in the first input of the
second input module.

COM 16DI 16DO 16DI 16DO

The address can be set in the GATEWAY module using selectors under the cover.

Open the cover: the selectors SW1, SW2 and SW3 are used to set the address. SW3 controls hundreds, SW2
controls tenths and SW1 controls units.
To set, for example, the address 124 set DIP switch 1 of SW3 in the ON position; set SW2 in the position 2 and
SW1 in the position 4.
The first rotating selector is used to include the terminating resistance. The figure shows it in the position that
includes the resistance.

Figure 68 – EX500 bus address setting

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 147 / 280

4.7.8 DP/DP COUPLER

The following picture shows an example based on a single DP/DP Coupler node; in case the network is
composed of other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

TH4’s network Customer’s network

Figure 69 – DP/DP Coupler example

The equivalent representation in the area HW physical view is:

DP/DP

The device has two sides to configure, one for TH4’s network and the other for customer’s network. Here are
described settings for one side, the procedure to perform settings on the other side is the same, but actual
settings can be determined only by customer’s.
By using DIP switches of the module configure:
- set PS on if power supply on side 1 is wired;
- set DIA on;
- set ADDR off;
- use remaining DIP switches to set the same Profibus address used in Hardware configuration (the Profibus
address is the same as the position in the hardware physical view).

Figure 70 – DP/DP Coupler address setting

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 148 / 280

4.7.9 SMC EX260

The following picture shows an example based on a single EX260 node; in case the network is composed of
other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

Manifold valves

N. Description
1: Fieldbus connector BUS OUT
2: Fieldbus connector BUS IN
3: Fieldbus connector
4: Power supply
5: Ground
6: Output connector
7: LED and selector
8: Hole for mounting

Regardless of the number of output modules installed the equivalent representation in the area HW physical
view is:

COM 32DO

The address can be set in the EX260-SI module in the same way of EX250 (see section 4.7.6)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 149 / 280

4.7.10 B&R X20+X67

The following picture shows an example based on a single B&R X20 node; in case the network is composed of
other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

The following picture shows an example based on a single B&R X67 node; in case the network is composed of
other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

The address can be set in the B&R X20 / X67 module using selectors. By means of the two rotating selectors it
is possible to set the address from 01 to 99.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 150 / 280

4.7.11 SEW MOVIMOT

The following picture shows an example based on a single SEW MOVIMOT node; in case the network is
composed of other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

The following picture shows the electrical and Profibus specifications of MOVIMOT:

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 151 / 280

4.7.12 Kawasaki ROBOTS

Kawasaki ROBOTS ser.E can be managed by Profibus as slave node.
The Profibus address can be set by a selector located in a board controller of ROBOT.

4.7.13 Siemens Safety PLC

The Siemens Safety PLC Profibus address is set by program and is not editable.

4.7.14 Heidenhain Encoder

The following picture shows an example based on a single Heidenhain Encoder node; in case the network is
composed of other nodes operate as indicated in the section “General information”.

The address can be set in the Heidenhain Encoder module using selectors. By means of the two rotating
selectors it is possible to set the address from 01 to 99.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 152 / 280

4.8 STEP 7 - SW COMPONENTS UPGRADE

Software components upgrade can be performed by means of the CONFIGURATION MENU or by means
of RECOVERY DISK tools.

REFERENCE
For more information about CONFIGURATION MENU see section 5,
about RECOVERY DISK see section 6.

The following information applies both to Software complete update menu and Software objects update menu of
CONFIGURATION MENU and Software update menu of RECOVERY DISK.

The following software elements can be installed:

1. PCS installation
2. P/G installation
3. FECP installation
4. GUI installation
5. JWORKS installation
6. O.S. installation
7. BOOTROM installation

REFERENCE
For more information about software installation please refer to section 4.

NOTE
To avoid visualization problems with P/G string messages it is recommended to reinstall P/G library
after PCS and/or GUI installation.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 153 / 280

4.9 STEP 8 – PRINTER FIRMWARE UPGRADE

IMPORTANT NOTE
This upgrade is necessary only for systems equipped with software W27 or later.
Systems equipped with software versions up to W26 support the standard thermal printer
firmware which is preloaded at factory level.

For systems equipped with W27 is still possible to use the standard thermal printer firmware
if it is acceptable to have a few chars (°, à, á, è, é, ì, í, ò, ó, ù, ú) printed differently or if these
chars are not used. If this is not the case, because the customer’s language heavily uses
them, it is necessary to load a different firmware. It the customer’s language adopts a non
standard codepage (for example Russian language) it is mandatory to load the specific
firmware in order to print correctly (to learn about system codepage see Language
Management section in User’s Manual).

4.9.1 Firmware configuration for CUSTOM TPT112HP printer

The printer can be configured from a standard PC (IBM compatible, running Microsoft Windows operating
system), by using UpgCePrn software tool, of the thermal printer vendor (CUSTOM Engineering).

IMPORTANT NOTE
In order for the tool to correctly work following requirements must be met:
- the parallel port of the PC must be set to SPP (Standard Parallel Mode) at BIOS level;
- the LPT port to be used in the transfer must not be used by any other process;
if the tool warns that the port is already in use, check for any printer driver set on that
port (for example Acrobat PDF Writer is usually attached to an LPT port).

The firmware can be loaded with the following procedure:

 Power on the printer;
 Connect the printer parallel cable to the Microsoft Windows PC;
 Start UpgCePrn v1.5 tool;
 Select the *.psw firmware file to download;
 Start the download by pushing the “Begin upgrade” button;
 At the end of the download connect the printer parallel cable to the Thema4 panel PC;
 Restart Thema4 system and check the codepage installed with Configuration Menu (to learn about how
to check the printer codepage see Special operations section in the Configuration Menu chapter of this
document).

IMPORTANT NOTE
The installation procedure for the software tool Upgceprn v1.5 is reported in chapter 8
MISCELLANEOUS

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 154 / 280

4.9.2 Firmware configuration for APS printer

The printer can be configured from a standard PC (IBM compatible, running Microsoft Windows operating
system), by using Flashing Utility software tool, of the thermal printer vendor (APS).

The firmware can be loaded with the following procedure:

 Power on the printer;
 Connect the printer USB to the Microsoft Windows PC;
 Start Flashing Utility tool;
 Press “Next” to proceede;
 Select “Click here to update the printer with an already existing package or firmware file” (version
1.3.0.0 only, if version 1.0.0.12 skip this step)
 Seelct the USB printer from the tree and press “Next”
 Select firmware file to download to the printer (version 1.3.0.0 only: do not flag the checbox “Check
me if you want to manage the printer contents manually”) and press “Next”;
 Press “Next” to skip generation of the output binary file, this will start the download;
 At the end of the download press “Finish” and connect the USB cable to the Thema4 panel PC;
 Restart Thema4 system and check the codepage installed with Configuration Menu (to learn about how
to check the printer codepage see Hardware Configuration section in the Configuration Menu chapter of
this document).

4.9.3 Firmware configuration for CUSTOM PLUS4 printer

The firmware of thermal printer CUSTOM PLUS4 already includes the code pages CP1250, CP1251 and
CP1252. Through the PRINTER SETTINGS it’s possible, by the option Code Table , to configure what
codepage to use.

The firmware can be loaded with the following procedure:

 Power on the printer;
 Connect the printer by USB cable to Microsoft Windows PC;
 Start UpgCePrn v2.14 tool;
 Select the *.psw firmware file to download;
 Start the download by pushing the “Begin upgrade” button;
 At the end of the download connect the printer to the Thema4 panel PC;
 Restart Thema4 system and check the codepage installed with Configuration Menu (to learn about how
to check the printer codepage see Special operations section in the Configuration Menu chapter of this
document).

IMPORTANT NOTE
The installation procedure for the software tool Upgceprn v2.14 is reported in chapter 8
MISCELLANEOUS

IMPORTANT NOTE
To download the firmware the thermal printer must be put in ESC/POS mode

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 155 / 280

The firmware can be configured with the following procedure:

 Press both button on the thenral printer and power on the device
 Adjuste the PRINTER EMULATION in according with the connection:
- SEIKO for parallel connection
- APS for USB connection
 Adjuste the CODE TABLE in according with the Code Page used

To more details please see the printout below.

Printer Emulation

Code Page

Print Density

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 4 Page 156 / 280

4.10 STEP 9 – LCD FIRMWARE UPGRADE

IMPORTANT NOTE
This upgrade is necessary only for system equipped with LCD model GLK 12232

Two LCD models are supported by Thema4 system:

a. EA SER 204 NLED (Electronic Assembly)
b. GLK 12232-25-FGW (Matrix Orbital)

IMPORTANT NOTE
Systems equipped with software versions up to W26 support only LCD model a.
Systems equipped with W27 or later support both models, in this case model b LCD must be
used when the system codepage is not standard (to learn about system codepage see
Language Management section in User Manual). Before use, model b LCD must be loaded
with some specific files. This operation is usually performed at factory level by Fedegari
following the procedure described in the next section.

4.10.1 Firmware configuration for LCD MATRIX ORBITAL

LCD MATRIX ORBITAL can be configured from a standard PC (IBM compatible, running Microsoft Windows
operating system), by using Mogd# software tool, provided by the LCD vendor (MATRIX ORBITAL).

The firmware can be loaded with the following procedure:

 Power on the LCD;
 Connect the LCD serial cable to the Microsoft Windows PC;
 Start Mogd tool;
 Choose the Download Image operation, select the Fedegari Logo.bmp file and download it as number 1;
 Choose the Fonts operation, select the SmallCP1252.mgf file and download it as number 1;
 Choose the Fonts operation, select the SmallCP1251.mgf file and download it as number 2;
 Choose the Fonts operation, select the SmallCP1250.mgf file and download it as number 3;
 At the end of downloads connect the LCD serial cable to the Thema4 panel PC;
 Restart Thema4 system.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 157 / 280

Section 5 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

5 CONFIGURATION MENU
5.1 - CONFIGURATION MENU FUNCTIONS
5.2 - CONFIGURATION MENU ACCESS
5.3 - CONFIGURATION MENU NAVIGATION AND
USAGE
5.3.1 - Main menu
5.3.2 - Set device
5.3.3 - Software complete update
5.3.4 - Software objects update
5.3.5 - Hardware configuration
5.3.6 - Stations configuration
5.3.7 - Authorization management
5.3.8 - Data Backup
5.3.9 - Archive management
5.3.10 - Special operations
5.3.11 - Exit

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 158 / 280

5.1 CONFIGURATION MENU FUNCTIONS

The CONFIGURATION MENU is an internal menu that allows to perform a set of operations on the Thema4
system, displayed in the following table:
N. Function Sub-functions
1 Set device 1.1 Set device to floppy
1.2 Set device to network
1.3 Set device to internal CD
1.4 Set device to USB key
1.5 Set device to USB floppy
1.6 Set device to USB ext.CD
2 Software complete update 2.1 Complete installation
3 Software objects update 3.1 PCS installation
3.2 P/G installation
3.3 FECP installation
3.4 GUI installation
3.5 JWORKS installation
3.6 O.S. installation
3.7 BOOTROM installation
3.8 Language installation
3.9 Database installation
3.10 Profibus card 3.10.1 Configuration install
3.10.2 Load into flash memory
3.11 Manuals/Help on line 3.11.1 Manauals installation
3.11.2 Help on line installation
3.11.3 Help on line deletion
3.12 Kerberos keytab file installation
4 Hardware configuration 4.1 Touch screen calibration
4.2 Printer management 4.2.1 Printer test
4.3 LCD management 4.3.1 LCD test
4.3.2 Change contrast
4.3.3 Horizontal/Vertical mounting
5 Stations configuration 5.1 Primary station address
5.2 Secondary station address
5.3 Maintenance station address
5.4 Remote stations addresses
5.5 Panel PC subnet mask
5.6 Panel PC gateway
5.7 DNS
6 Authorization 6.1 Authorization install
management 6.2 Register software licence
6.3 Delete factory parameters
7 Backup 7.1 Backup
8 Archive management 8.1 Reset
9 Special operations 9.1 Export alarm used
9.2 Special parameters 9.2.1 Blackout return time
9.2.2 Run progressive number
9.2.3 Sterilization OK number
9.2.4 Drager warm-up timeout
9.2.5 Drager warm-up after blackout
9.2.6 Decontamination OK number
9.2.7 Wash OK number
9.2.8 Disinfection OK number
9.3 Configure System info logging 9.3.1 Polling time (s)
9.3.2 Log queue (h)
9.4 PDF settings 9.4.1 Load company logo
9.4.2 Load watermark image
9.5 Documents upload 9.5.1 Load Program Procedure
9.6 Configure P/G debug log 9.6.1 File format (Text, Xml)
9.6.2 Max historic log queue (MB)
9.7 Units of measure 9.7.1 Temperature units
9.7.2 Pressure Units
9.8 Load P&ID data file
Table 6 - THEMA4 CONFIGURATION MENU (W30)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 159 / 280

NOTE
To use the RECOVERY DISK an external PC keyboard is needed. It is a PS2 keyboard for all
panel PC except Proface PS3650A, which requires an USB keyboard.

NOTE
For panel PC Proface PS-2000B also connect an external monitor to the VGA port and, if the OS
software version is B1 connect also a PS2 mouse.

IMPORTANT NOTE
The layout of the Configuration Menu starting from the W30 is significantly different from the
layout of previous software versions, due to a different arrangement of menu items. For
details see the revision of Installation Manual that matches the software version in use.
For software versions previous W30, please see the Appendix B.

5.2 CONFIGURATION MENU ACCESS

To access the configuration menu follow these steps:

1. Connect an external PC keyboard to the Panel PC

2. Turn on the system
3. During booting, when the message “Press any key to request CONFIGURATION MENU...” is shown
press a key
4. A user ID is requested: insert an user ID valid for the system.
5. A password is requested: insert the password corresponding to the typed user ID.
6. Only if Remote Authentication is enabled, specify if the login provided is local or remote by acting on
arrows keys: the access type label will change to LOCAL or REMOTE.
7. If the login is correct (since W13: and if the login owns “configuration menu” access right) the
configuration menu is displayed.

WARNING!!
Login check for Configuration menu access follows the same rules as a normal login check
into welcome page and so, for example, it is possible to disable a login if the maximum
number of wrong retries is exceeded.

NOTE
Since W13 version also a specific authorization to use configuration menu is needed. This
authorization can be assigned during the login creation by selecting the flag “Configuration
menu”. When installing W13 or next application software key already existent are upgraded
assigning “Configuration menu” access to every administrator login.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 160 / 280

5.3 CONFIGURATION MENU NAVIGATION AND USAGE

To navigate into the configuration menu use following keyboard keys:

ARROW UP select the previous menu item

ARROW DOWN select the next menu item
ENTER select the menu item, executes an action, allows modification of particular menu
items
ESC stops actions, cancel data typed but not already confirmed

IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from W27 the system is able to handle different layouts of keyboards.

At the bottom of the screen, a message informs the user about the currently selected keyboard layout and how
to change it.
To change the keyboard layout it is necessary to press together the Alt and the Tab key; when the Tab key is
released the next available keyboard is selected.
It is possible to select all keyboards installed in the system, provided that they are supported by the system
codepage (see Language Management in the User Manual), plus the default built-in English US keyboard which
is always present.
For example: for systems with the standard codepage many different keyboard layouts will be available (English
US, English UK, Italian, French, German, Spanish…); for systems with Cyrillic codepages only two keyboards
will be available (English US and Russian).

The following picture shows an example of the message at the bottom of the screen.

CONFIGURATION MENU (Device = none)

1. Set device
2. Software complete update
3. Software objects update
4. Hardware configuration
5. Station configuration
6. Authorization management
7. Backup
8. Archive management
9. Special operations
10. Exit

Press Alt+Tab to change the keyboard layout: English US (builtin)

Table 7 - Keyboard layout message

IMPORTANT NOTE
Once the keyboard has been changed this information is saved in machine state so this
setting will be retained at the next boot, unless system codepage changes (as a
consequence of a software update).

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 161 / 280

5.3.1 Main menu

The main menu shows the following items:

CONFIGURATION MENU (Device = none)

1. Set device
2. Software complete update
3. Software objects update
4. Hardware configuration
5. Station configuration
6. Authorization management
7. Backup
8. Archive management
9. Special operations
10. Exit
Table 8 - Configuration menu

The highlighted item is the one actually selected.

The caption indicates that no device has been selected for software installation or backup operations.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 162 / 280

5.3.2 Set device

Some operations such as software installation or backup require a device, which is the source (in case of
software installation) or the destination (in case of backup) of the operation.
For software versions before W30 the device was to be set every time these operations were performed; starting
from W30 the device can be set once at the beginning and changed if required.

The device currently set is indicated in the caption of each page, after the text “Device =”. If not set the text
“none” is displayed, otherwise a more precise indication of the source is shown.

1 SET DEVICE (Device = none)

1. Set device to floppy

2. Set device to network
3. Set device to internal CD
4. Set device to USB key
5. Set device to USB floppy
6. Set device to USB ext.CD
7. Back
Table 9 – Set device

IMPORTANT NOTE
Some of the items in figure might not be present if the hardware of the panel does not
support them.

NOTE
Please note that items related to USB devices will appear only if the corresponding device is
plugged in the USB port. For this reason it is possible than items 4, 5 and 6 may not appear
or appear associated to different numbers.
Please note that the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.

REFERENCE
Please refer to chapter 8.2 for important hints about USB devices.

Highlight the desired device and press ENTER to select it, the caption will change indicating the device selected.
In case of network it is required to type additional information such as:
- Host name: IP address of the FTP server;
- User ID: a valid username for the FTP server;
- Password: the corresponding FTP server password.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Operations that require a device are not available before the device is set. Such operations
will fail indicating to select a device first.

When a operation that involves a device is carried on messages on the right half of the screen might appear.
They can be red, indicating an error, white, indicating user input or green, indicating a positive feedback or an
action to perform. Messages can be slightly different depending by the operation to be performed and the
selected device. These are

floppy or The message “Insert disk and strike a key” warns to insert the right disk in the floppy drive
USB floppy and press a keyboard key. If floppy drive is empty or the wrong floppy is in the drive an error
message will be printed.
If the installation requires more than one floppy, the message “Insert disk # and strike a key”
will be shown.
When the installation is finished will appear the message “Installation terminated”.
In case of backup operation a message “Disk full, replace and strike a key” might be shown.
In this case insert a new floppy disk to span the backup over multiple volumes. If multiple
volumes where created, at the end it will be asked to insert again the first volume.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 163 / 280

network If network parameters are not ok, if the connection is not working properly and if the FTP
server on host machine is not correctly configured an error message will be displayed. The
error message might take about one minute to be displayed in case a timeout on a network
operation has to expire.
At the end of the installation process appears the message “Installation terminated”.
USB key The message “Insert disk on key and strike a key” warns to ensure the USB key plugged is
the correct one and strike a key to proceed with installation. If you feel it is the wrong key you
can cancel the operation by pressing ESC.
At the end of the installation process appears the message “Installation terminated”.
CD or in the right half of the screen appears the message “Insert CD and strike a key”. If the CD into
USB ext.CD the drive is the right one press a key to start the procedure. If you feel it is the wrong key you
can either cancel the operation by pressing ESC or swap the CD and leave enough time to
the CD drive to read the content of the new disk.
At the end of the installation process appears the message “Installation terminated”.

This peripheral can’t be used as a destination of operations.

Table 10 – Device related messages

IMPORTANT NOTE
The backup operation is not supported by external CD an appropriate message error is
displayed in case of operation 7.1 (backup) and 9.1 (alarm export).

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 164 / 280

5.3.3 Software complete update

By selecting Software complete update form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is
shown:
2 SOFTWARE COMPLETE UPDATE (Device = none)

1. Complete installation
2. Back

Table 11 - Software complete update submenu

From this menu it is possible to carry on all the operations required for a software update with a single
command.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation requires the CD SOFTWARE BACKUP shipped from Fedegari, and might not
work correctly with an abstract, by the moment that a lot of items are installed and they must
all be present on the device for a successful upgrade.

By selecting “Complete installation” and pressing ENTER the following operations are carried on in sequence:
- install PCS;
- install FECP;
- install GUI;
- install JWORKS;
- install OS;
- install P/G;
- try to install authorization, will be upgraded only if different from the one already installed;
- install config.ply;
- flash profibus card;
- install on-line manual;
- launch touch screen calibration.

If an error happens the procedure is stopped and a red error message appears, otherwise a green message
“Complete installation OK!” is displayed.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation will work only if a device has been selected, and the source of installation will
be the selected device.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 165 / 280

5.3.4 Software objects update

By selecting Software objects update form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is
shown:
3 SOFTWARE OBJECTS UPDATE (Device = none)

1. PCS installation
2. P/G installation
3. FECP installation
4. GUI installation
5. JWORKS installation
6. O.S. installation
7. BOOTROM installation
8. Language installation
9. Database installation
10. Profibus card
11. Manuals/Help on line
12. Kerberos keytab file installation
13. Back
Table 12 - Software objects update submenu

From this menu it is possible to update individually software components of the Thema4 System: each menu
item allows the installation of a specific software component.
To install a specific component select it and press ENTER, this will start installation if a device has been set,
otherwise an error message will be displayed.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation will work only if a device has been selected (except for item 3.10.2 which is
always available), and the source of installation will be the selected device.

5.3.4.1 Software components

Items from 1 to 7 allow to install main software components of the Thema4 System. By installing all these
components the software will be upgraded completely.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Always install P/G library after installing PCS and/or GUI, to avoid missing phase names or
phase parameters in printout or in graphical user interface. This is due to the fact that the
P/G library might have a more recent string file than PCS or GUI.

NOTE
If the system is composed also by a secondary and/or a maintenance then appears a
message asking a confirm to update them also. Secondary and/or maintenance need to be
“alive” to be updated.

5.3.4.2 Language installation

Item 8 allows to install or update the CUSTOM language.
The CUSTOM language is a special language that the user can modify to display and print customized
messages. This feature is available starting from W23.1 and to be functional the “custom language” option must
be enabled in the authorization file.

The CUSTOM language is delivered with messages identical to the ENGLISH language and is up to the
customer to change it as needed. After user modification the language can be loaded by means of this menu. If
the option is not enabled the message “THIS FEATURE IS NOT ENABLED” is displayed, otherwise CUSTOM
language files are installed.

IMPORTANT NOTE
When PCS, GUI or P/G are installed also related language file are installed, including
CUSTOM language. For this reason it is necessary to reinstall a customized CUSTOM
language after each software installation.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 166 / 280

NOTE
Please note that it is not possible to install the CUSTOM language directly from the CD shipped
from Fedegari (both from network than from external CD, or from a disk-on-key created directly
from it): a specific handling must be made to copy the set of languages directly in the root of the
media.

NOTE
If the system is composed also by a secondary and/or a maintenance then appears a
message asking a confirm to update them also. Secondary and/or maintenance need to be
“alive” to be updated.

WARNING!!
The correct composition of language files is not checked during installation. Problems that
may arise by loading an incorrect set of language files are up to the customer.

5.3.4.3 Database installation

Item 9 allows to install a new set of equipment databases. The system stores into databases profibus equipment
list, modules list and sensors supported, which are installed as part of PCS software. The aim of this menu is to
give more flexibility, allowing to change the set of databases independently from PCS software.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Databases are installed during software installation as part of PCS software so normally
there is no need to install it separately.
This means also that after installing the PCS component any customized database version
will be overwritten.

NOTE
Please note that it is not possible to install (separately) databases directly from the CD shipped
from Fedegari (both from network than from external CD, or from a disk-on-key created directly
from it): a specific handling must be made to copy the set of languages directly in the root of the
media.

WARNING!!
Software installation is designed such a way that database installed are fully erased and
reinstalled at every installation. This means that every database installed with this menu will
be erased at the next software update and it will be necessary to reinstall it.

5.3.4.4 Profibus card

Item 9 allows to perform operations related to the Profibus card by means of the following submenu:
3.10 PROFIBUS CARD CONFIGURATION (Device = none)

1. Configuration install
2. Load into flash memory
3. Back
Table 13 - Profibus card configuration submenu

By selecting Configuration install it is possible to install on the hard drive a new configuration file for the profibus
card.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation installs the profibus configuration on the hard disk and must be done every
time that the profibus peripheral is updated (a module is added or removed).

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 167 / 280

By selecting Load into flash memory the profibus configuration stored on the hard disk is loaded into the flash
memory of the PCI profibus card.
In the right half of the screen appears the message “Loading…” and when the operation is finished will appear a
message like “Done” or “Done but this is an old file”.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation must be done every time that a new configuration is loaded or if the profibus
card has been replaced with a new one.

5.3.4.5 Manuals/Help on line

Item 11 allows to install Manuals and Help on line by means of the following submenu:
3.11 MANUALS/HELP ON LINE INSTALLATION (Device = network)

1. Manuals installation
2. Help on line installation
3. Help on line deletion
4. Back
Table 14 – Manuals/help on line installation submenu

By selecting Manuals installation it is possible to install the on line manual from the selected device.

NOTE
If the system is composed also by a secondary and/or a maintenance then appears a
message asking a confirm to update them also. Secondary and/or maintenance need to be
“alive” to be updated.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Help on line is currently not available so items 2 and 3 cause a warning to be displayed.

5.3.4.6 Install kerberos keytab files

Item 12 allows to install the keytab file needed to set up a connection to a remote authentication system. This
operation is not part of the normal upgrade of the software and is to be done only when specific Microsoft Active
Directory settings change.

REFERENCE
Please see User Manual to learn more about Remote Authentication option.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 168 / 280

5.3.5 Hardware configuration

By selecting Hardware configuration form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
4 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION (Device = none)

1. Touch screen calibration

2. Printer management
3. LCD management
4. Back

Table 15 – Hardware configuration submenu

From this menu it is possible to perform operations related to hardware components of Thema4 System.

5.3.5.1 Touch screen calibration

Item 1 allows to perform touch screen calibration by selecting it and pressing ENTER. The calibration procedure
is slightly different depending by the touch screen driver installed.

IMPORTANT NOTE
For the blind PC Proface PS2000B this operation is disabled by the moment that the pointing
device is the mouse instead of a touch screen.

5.3.5.1.1 Touch screen calibration - generic

The following 4 screens appear in sequence (for Siemens PC577, Proface PS3650A or A-B Versa View 1500P
Ser.E see next paragraph):

Press 1 to confirm point Press 2 to confirm point

or ESC to quit or ESC to quit

Press 3 to confirm point Press 4 to confirm point

or ESC to quit or ESC to quit

Touch each point of the screen, as indicated by the arrow, and confirm with the relevant numeric key.

By pressing ESC during the operation the calibration will be left unchanged.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 169 / 280

WARNING!!
Be careful to touch the screen always before changing the calibration corner. Failing to do
so will insert an invalid configuration in touch screen calibration. This will cause a GUI or
configuration menu crash every time when the screen is touched. If you feel that you have
not acquired a corner press ESC before the end of the calibration procedure and repeat.

5.3.5.1.2 Touch screen calibration - specific for panel PC: SIEMENS PC577, Proface PS3650A, A-B Versa
View 1500P Ser.E and SIEMENS Simatic IPC577C
The following 9 screens appear in sequence:

1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9.

Touch each point of the screen, as indicated by the arrow, and release the point to continue.

IMPORTANT NOTE
After a inactivity time out of 15 seconds, the screen returns at the Touch screen calibration
submenu and it is necessary to repeat the procedure.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 170 / 280

5.3.5.1.3 Touch screen calibration - specific for Box PC “B&R APC 810” + Automation Panel 900, Allen
Bradley 1500P ser.F
The following 3 points appear in sequence:

1 3

Touch each point of the screen, to complete the calibration of touch screen.

IMPORTANT NOTE
After a inactivity time out of 15 seconds, the screen returns at the Touch screen calibration
submenu and it is necessary to repeat the procedure.

5.3.5.2 Printer management

By selecting Printer Management and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
4.2 PRINTER MANAGEMENT (Device = none)

1. Printer test
2. Back

Table 16 - Printer Management submenu

Item 1 allows to perform a print test on the thermal printer. This print test produces, on the thermal paper, a
printscreen with the codepage of the printer, this allows to check that the printer is operating properly and the
codepage installed (see User Manual for Printing Non Latin Languages section). Please ensure the thermal
printer is connected, it is powered and it is feeded with paper, then start the test.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 171 / 280

5.3.5.3 LCD management

By selecting LCD Management and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
4.3 LCD MANAGEMENT (Device = none)

1. LCD test
2. Change contrast
3. Horizontal/Vertical mounting
4. Back

Table 17 - LCD Management submenu

This operation allows to perform a communication test with the LCD and to tune display contrast in case of
Matrix Orbital display.

Item 1 allows to perform a test of the LCD by displaying a sequence of all codepage characters on the display.
This allows to check communication with the device, if the device is working properly and the codepage currently
selected.

Item 2 is available only for Matrix Orbital display and allows to tune the contrast of the display. This can be done
by typing a number between 1 and 255. Optimum values can vary, but it is generally near 180.

Item 3 is available only for Matrix Orbital GLK24064-25-GW display and allows to set the orientation of the
writing of the text strings in horizontal or vertical mode on the LCD display. The vertical orientation is available
only for Chinese language.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 172 / 280

5.3.6 Stations configuration

Station configuration allows setting of IP addresses of THEMA4. The list below shows default addresses of the
Thema4 control system:
Primary : panel PC side 1 default address : 60.0.0.14
Secondary : panel PC side 2 default address : 60.0.1.14
Maintenance : panel PC technical area default address : 60.0.2.14
Remote : Remote GUI (max 50) default address : from 60.0.3.14 to 60.0.52.14
Subnet mask : subnet mask for panel PCs default: 255.0.0.0
Gateway : gateway for panel PCs default: NO GATEWAY
DNS : DNS for panel PCs default: NO DNS
Table 18 - Stations configuration default addresses

Selecting Stations configuration from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
5 STATIONS CONFIGURATION (Device = none)

1. Primary station address

2. Secondary station address
3. Maintenance station address
4. Remote station addresses
5. Panel PC subnet mask
6. Panel PC gateway
7. DNS
8. Back
Table 19 - Stations configuration submenu

Primary station address allows to change IP address of the primary Panel PC. If the system is composed also
of a secondary or a maintenance then they are notified about primary IP address
change to allow them to connect to the primary at the next system start. For this
reason secondary and maintenance need to be “alive” when the address is changed.
Secondary station allow to change the IP address of Secondary or Maintenance Panel PC. The update
address and takes place from the primary station through the network; for this reason secondary
Maintenance station and maintenance need to be “alive” when the address is changed.
address
Remote station allows to change IP address(es) of remote(s) connected. This operation won’t really
addresses change IP addresses of remote PC and it is not necessary for them to be connected
when the address is set. The IP address of remote stations must be set through their
native operative system tools. This operation just tells the primary which stations will
try to connect as a remote station.
Panel PC subnet mask allows to change the subnet mask for all the Panel PCs of the system: all the three
Panel PCs will share the same subnet mask in order to be able to communicate. The
subnet mask for a remote station must be set directly in the Remote Station PC
(Windows based) by means of native tools. The update takes place from the primary
station through the network; for this reason secondary and maintenance need to be
“alive” when the subnet is changed.
The subnet mask must be valid so following error messages may appear:
SYNTAX ERROR: means that the subnet mask typed contains letters, numbers
greater than 255, negative numbers or is 0.0.0.0
SUBNET MASK IS NOT CONTIGUOUS: means that the subnet mask typed does not
follow the rule to be composed of two consecutive set of 1 and 0 bits.
ONE OR MORE INVALID ADDRESSES: means that the subnet mask typed is does
not allow to reach one of the configured stations or it is 255.255.255.255. This check
is not performed for Remote Stations if a Gateway is defined.
Panel PC gateway allows to change the gateway for all the Panel PCs of the system: all the three Panel
PCs will share the same gateway in order to be able to communicate. The gateway for
a remote station must be set directly in the Remote Station PC (Windows based) by
means of native tools. The update takes place from the primary station through the
network; for this reason secondary and maintenance need to be “alive” when the
subnet is changed. The default setting is NO GATEWAY; to set a Gateway type a
valid IP address. If a Gateway has been set and need to be removed just press
ENTER without typing anything.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 173 / 280

DNS allows to change the DNS for the primary panel PC of the system. This DNS is used
for OPT.30 but not for OPT.26 which use the DNS that can be set within General
Login data dedicated to Remote Authentication. Note that this item is not shown in the
“classical” configuration menu of the “embedded” version of Thema4, because it can
be set from the “web” configuration menu.
Table 20 - Stations configuration submenu elements description

Selecting items 1, 2 or 3 and pressing ENTER will show the actual IP address and a prompt which allows to
change it.
5 STATIONS CONFIGURATION (Device = none)

1. Primary station address 60.0.0.15

2. Secondary station address
3. Maintenance station address
4. Remote station addresses
5. Panel PC subnet mask
6. Panel PC gateway
7. DNS
8. Back
Table 21 - Example of setting primary IP address

Pressing ESC will leave the IP address unchanged, pressing ENTER will apply the new IP address.

Selecting item 4 and pressing ENTER will show the request to select a station number. Depending on the
number of remote licence owned will be possible to enter up to 50 IP addresses.
5 STATIONS CONFIGURATION (Device = none)

1. Primary station address

2. Secondary station address
3. Maintenance station address
4. Remote station addresses Number: |
5. Panel PC subnet mask
6. Panel PC gateway
7. DNS
8. Back
Table 22 - Example of setting remote IP addresses (part 1)

Enter a number between 1 and 50. If the Remote station is enabled then will appear the IP address and the
prompt to change it. If the IP address is not enabled then will appear the message “Station not allowed”.
5 STATIONS CONFIGURATION (Device = none)

1. Primary station address

2. Secondary station address
3. Maintenance station address
4. Remote station addresses 60.0.0.1 |
5. Panel PC subnet mask
6. Panel PC gateway
7. DNS
8. Back
Table 23 - Example of setting remote IP addresses (part 2)

Pressing ESC will leave the IP address unchanged, pressing ENTER will apply the new IP address.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 174 / 280

Selecting item 5 and pressing ENTER will show the subnet mask and a prompt which allows to change it.
5 STATIONS CONFIGURATION (Device = none)

1. Primary station address

2. Secondary station address
3. Maintenance station address
4. Remote station addresses
5. Panel PC subnet mask 255.0.0.0: |
6. Panel PC gateway
7. DNS
8. Back
Table 24 - Example of setting subnet mask

Pressing ESC will leave the subnet mask unchanged, pressing ENTER will apply the new value. If an error is
shown then the subnet mask is unchanged.

Selecting item 6 and pressing ENTER will show the gateway and a prompt which allows to change it.
5 STATIONS CONFIGURATION (Device = none)

1. Primary station address

2. Secondary station address
3. Maintenance station address
4. Remote station addresses
5. Panel PC subnet mask
6. Panel PC gateway NO GATEWAY: |
7. DNS
8. Back
Table 25 - Example of setting gateway

Pressing ESC will leave the gateway unchanged, typing a value and pressing ENTER will apply the new value,
pressing ENTER without typing any value will remove the Gateway. If an error is shown then the gateway is
unchanged.

Selecting item 7 and pressing ENTER will show the gateway and a prompt which allows to change it.
5 STATIONS CONFIGURATION (Device = none)

1. Primary station address

2. Secondary station address
3. Maintenance station address
4. Remote station addresses
5. Panel PC subnet mask
6. Panel PC gateway
7. DNS NO DNS: |
8. Back

Table 26 - Example of setting DNS

Pressing ESC will leave the DNS unchanged, typing a value and pressing ENTER will apply the new value,
pressing ENTER without typing any value will remove the DNS. If an error is shown then the DNS is unchanged.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 175 / 280

5.3.7 Authorization management

Selecting Authorization management from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
6 AUTHORIZATION MANAGEMENT (Device = none)

1. Authorization install
2. Register software licence
3. Delete factory parameters
4. Back
Table 27 - Authorization management submenu

IMPORTANT NOTE
Operation 1 will work only if a device has been selected, and the source of installation will
be the selected device.

5.3.7.1 Authorization install

Item 1 allows to install the authorization file from the selected device. The authorization “configures” the sterilizer
by setting some internal parameters such as: remote GUI enablement, external recorder enablement, list of
P/G’s enabled in the installed library.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Only an authorization file with the same factory number (NF) can be loaded to overwrite the
previous one.
This means that It is not possible to install on a sterilizer an authorization that has been
written for another sterilizer. The system won’t install it and will show the message “New
authorization not valid”.

NOTE
It is not possible to install the same authorization more than once. The system won’t install
it and will show the message “This authorization has already been installed”.

5.3.7.2 Register software licence

Item 2 allows to display or register the software licence. To view the software license number select the item and
press ENTER: if it has been already set it will be displayed. To register the software license type the serial
number in the input area as shown below.
6 AUTHORIZATION MANAGEMENT (Device = none)

1. Authorization install
2. Register software licence SN: |
3. Delete factory parameters
4. Back
Table 28 - Typing serial number

IMPORTANT NOTE
If the serial number typed is not correct an error message is shown.
After the third wrong insertion this function is temporary locked, and a message informing
that it is not possible to type it anymore until a reboot is shown.
If the serial number is correct it is accepted and the software is registered.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 176 / 280

5.3.7.3 Delete factory parameters

Item 3 allows to delete factory parameters, which is an operation needed to reload factory data from the
authorization file. After deleting factory parameters exit the Configuration Menu and reboot the system to let the
system realod factory parameters from authorization file.

IMPORTANT NOTE
After deleting factory parameters some operations of the Configuration Menu might not
work. For this reason is mandatory to reboot after performing this operation.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation causes Tmax of temperatures probes to be lost. Please record these
information before to carry on this operation and set them back by means of GUI after
system reboot.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 177 / 280

5.3.8 Data Backup

Selecting Backup from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
7 BACKUP (Device = network)

1. Backup Current Hist Hidden

Configuration [ ] [ ] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [ ] [ ]
Programs [ ] [ ] [ ]
Maintenance [ ] [ ] [ ]
Access management [ ] [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ] [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] ZIP format
2. Back
Table 29 - Backup submenu

This menu allows to perform a backup of machine on the selected device using “File format” or “ZIP format”.
“File format” is the classical format, “ZIP format” is a more compact format that stores files to be backupped in a
single ZIP file. This second solution is faster, saves disk space, allows to perform a full floppy backup on few
disks and makes network backup more safe.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation will work only if a device has been selected, and the destination of backup
will be the selected device.

5.3.8.1 Selection of data to backup

The first phase consist in selection of elements to be backupped.
Item Description
Configuration Machine configuration: system parameters , alarm configuration, hardware config…
Cycles Cycles,
Programs Programs
Maintenance Maintenance plan, filter maintenance, hard disk maintenance parameters
Access Logins
management
Audit trail Audit trail
Process reports Executed cycle report
State machine Machine state internal data (progressive run cycle, sterilization ok, current language…)
Alarms This item is not actually implemented and will not be possible to select anything.
System diagnostic Machine diagnostic internal data.
Backup jobs Backup task configured. This item is available starting from W23 software release.
Table 30 - Backup submenu elements description

NOTE
Selectable items are the same as shown in the GUI backup page.

WARNING!!
The item “State machine” contains information such as the number of cycle performed and
the number of successful sterilizations. For this reason it is important to restore them only if
needed, otherwise it may happen to produce a cycle with the same number as an older one.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 178 / 280

For each data type, when applicable, it is possible to choose:

- Current: data currently used by the controller (for example system parameters currently in use)
- Historic: archived copies of data in the “operating“ section of the hard drive (for example system parameters
in use last year);
- Hidden: archived copies of data in the “hidden” section of the hard drive (for example system parameters in
use 5 years ago, moved in the hidden section after a maintenance archive operation).

To select the desired combination operate as follows:

pressing ENTER the first time changes the selection as follows: [x] [ ] [ ]
pressing ENTER a second time: [ ] [x] [ ]
pressing ENTER a third time: [x] [x] [ ]
pressing ENTER a fourth time: [ ] [ ] [x]
pressing ENTER a fifth time: [x] [ ] [x]
pressing ENTER a sixth time: [ ] [x] [x]
pressing ENTER a seventh time: [x] [x] [x]
pressing ENTER again the operations continue in a cyclical way.

With this method it is possible to fill the table of elements to be backupped.

For some elements there are only current or historical data.

5.3.8.2 Selection of data format: normal files or zipped files

Then, if a “ZIP format” is wanted, select the corresponding row and press ENTER:
[x] ZIP format

Otherwise the format used will be “File Format”.

5.3.8.3 Backup execution

Once the selection is complete it is possible to perform the backup on the desired device by selecting the first
row and pressing ENTER. By selecting the last row and pressing ENTER the backup process will be canceled.
7 BACKUP (Device = network)

1. Backup Current Hist Hidden

Configuration [x] [ ] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [x] [x]
Programs [ ] [x] [x]
Maintenance [x] [x] [x]
Access management [ ] [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [x]
Process report [x] [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ]
System diagnostic [x]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ] [ ]
[x] ZIP format
2. Back
Table 31 - Performing the backup

During the backup operation the percentage of completion is displayed replaced by “Done” message when the
operation is complete.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 179 / 280

5.3.9 Archive management

Selecting Archive management from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
8 ARCHIVE MANAGEMENT (Device = none)

1. Reset Current Hist Hidden

Configuration [ ] [ ] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [ ] [ ]
Programs [ ] [ ] [ ]
Maintenance [ ] [ ] [ ]
Access management [ ] [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ] [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ] [ ]
2. Back
Table 32 - Archive Management Reset submenu

This menu allows to perform a reset of specific categories of machine data.

5.3.9.1 Selection of data to reset

The first phase is the selection of elements to be deleted.
Item Description
Configuration Machine configuration: system parameters , alarm configuration, hardware config…
Cycles Cycles,
Programs Programs
Maintenance Maintenance plan, filter maintenance, hard disk maintenance parameters
Access Logins
management
Audit trail Audit trail
Process reports Executed cycle report
State machine Machine state internal data (progressive run cycle, sterilization ok, current language…)
Alarms Log records of last 1000 transitions of alarms, according to alarm configuration.
System diagnostic Machine diagnostic internal data.
Backup jobs Backup task configured. This item is available starting from W23 software release.
Table 33 – Archive Management submenu elements description

NOTE
Selectable items are the same as shown in the GUI backup page.

WARNING!!
The item “State machine” contains information such as the number of cycle performed and
the number of successful sterilizations. For this reason it is important to restore them only if
needed, otherwise it may happen to produce a cycle with the same number as an older one.

For each data type, when applicable, it is possible to choose:

- Current: data currently used by the controller (for example system parameters currently in use)
- Historic: archived copies of data in the “operating“ section of the hard drive (for example system parameters
in use last year);
- Hidden: archived copies of data in the “hidden” section of the hard drive (for example system parameters in
use 5 years ago, moved in the hidden section after a maintenance archive operation).

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 180 / 280

To select the desired combination operate as follows:

pressing ENTER the first time changes the selection as follows: [x] [ ] [ ]
pressing ENTER a second time: [ ] [x] [ ]
pressing ENTER a third time: [x] [x] [ ]
pressing ENTER a fourth time: [ ] [ ] [x]
pressing ENTER a fifth time: [x] [ ] [x]
pressing ENTER a sixth time: [ ] [x] [x]
pressing ENTER a seventh time: [x] [x] [x]
pressing ENTER again the operations continue in a cyclical way.

With this method it is possible to fill the table of elements to be removed. The selection follows the same rules of
backup selection.

5.3.9.2 Data reset execution

When the selection has been done it is possible to start the removal of elements selected by choosing the first
row and pressing ENTER.
8 ARCHIVE MANAGEMENT (Device = none)

1. Reset Current Hist Hidden

Configuration [ ] [x] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [x] [ ]
Programs [ ] [x] [ ]
Maintenance [x] [x] [x]
Access management [x] [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ] [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ]
System diagnostic [x]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ] [ ]
2. Back
Table 34 - Performing the reset

When the reset operation is complete appears the message “Done”.

5.3.9.3 Reset of logins or archives

This menu allows some standard operations such as: reset of logins, reset of archives.

Reset of Logins: by selecting Current and historic Access management data it is possible to remove every
saved login. At the next boot of the system will be loaded only the standard key SUP 1111. This operation is
useful when all administrators logins have been forgotten.

8 ARCHIVE MANAGEMENT (Device = none)

1. Reset Current Hist Hidden

Configuration [ ] [ ] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [ ] [ ]
Programs [ ] [ ] [ ]
Maintenance [ ] [ ] [ ]
Access management [x] [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ] [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ] [ ]
2. Back
Table 35 - Performing login reset

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 181 / 280

Reset of archives: by selecting checkboxes in the historic column it is possible to remove all the past history of
the machine freeing space on the hard disk.
8 ARCHIVE MANAGEMENT (Device = none)

1. Reset Current Hist Hidden

Configuration [ ] [x] [x]
Cycles [ ] [x] [x]
Programs [ ] [x] [x]
Maintenance [ ] [x] [x]
Access management [ ] [x] [x]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [x] [x]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [x] [x]
2. Back
Table 36 - Performing archives reset

By performing both these operations it is possible for a customer to delete every record generated by Fedegari’s
activity and start with a clean machine.

WARNING!!
Reset of archives is not reversible. Is recommended to perform before a backup of data
being deleted.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 182 / 280

5.3.10 Special operations

Selecting Special operations from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
9 SPECIAL OPERATIONS

1. Export alarm used

2. Special parameters
3. Configure System info logging
4. PDF settings
5. Documents upload
6. Configure P/G debug log
7. Back

Table 37 - Special operations submenu

This menu gathers operation that do not fit into other categories of operations that can be found in the
configuration menu. These are shown in the picture above.

5.3.10.1 Export alarm used

This operation allows to export in CSV format (encoded as UNICODE) the list of alarms in use in the system
(see User Manual for Configured Alarms section). By selecting this item the CSV file is generated and
transferred to the device selected.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation will work only if a device has been selected, and the destination of the export
operation will be the selected device.

5.3.10.2 Special parameters

This operation allows to set the value of some low level parameters.
9.2 SPECIAL PARAMETERS

1. Blackout return time

2. Run progressive number
3. Sterilization OK number
4. Back
Table 38 - Special parameters

The Blackout return time parameter is the time the system waits before to recover from a blackout, after the
electrical power has been turned on. This time is needed for decentralized peripheral to restart, and for analog
inputs to reach a stable value. The default value is 15 seconds, but it might need adjustment due to hardware
tolerances.

The Run progressive number is the number of cycles executed by the sterilizer. This number is increased
automatically by the software every time a new program is started and it is essential to identify process reports
produced.
The Sterilization OK number is the number of cycles with successful sterilization. This number is increased
automatically by the software every time a successful sterilization is completed and is important to identify
process reports produced.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Setting Run Progressive Number and Sterilization OK number are crtical operations and are
provided with the only purpose to restore the correct values that might have been lost due
to a reset or restore operation of the “State machine” data category.
The correct employ of these operations is under customer’s responsibility.

REFERENCE
Please see User Manual to learn more about Run Progressive Number and Sterilization OK
number.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 183 / 280

5.3.10.3 Configure System Info Logging

This operation allows to set two parameters that control the behaviour of the System Info Logging feature:
9.3 CONFIGURE SYSTEM INFO LOGGING

1. Polling time (s)

2. Log queue (h)
3. Back
Table 39 – Configure System Info Logging

The parameter Polling time (s) ranges from 0 to 60 and controls the period used to collect system information;
when set to 0 this feature is disabled.

The paremeter Log queue (h) ranges from 2 to 168 and controls the amount of logged data kept on the
controller. The default value is 24 which means that data older than 24 hours are deleted. When this feature is
selected this check is performed every hour.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This feature is intended to perform analysis of system performance. It should not be enabled
if not stated by Fedegari’s assistance, because it can have a impact on system
performances, even if small.

5.3.10.4 PDF settings

This operation allows to load logo and watermark for PDF and A4 printing.
9.4 PDF SETTINGS

1. Load company logo

2. Load watermark image
3. Back
Table 40 – PDF settings

The item Load company logo allows to load from the device selected an image file named “logo.gif”, “logo.jpg” or
“logo.png”, which should represent the customer’s company logo. If none of these files can be found on the
support then an error message is shown. If the file size is greather of 60 Kbytes a warning message is shown to
indicate that the file size is too large, but the loading is performed anyway.
If the operation succeeds it is registered into audit trail.

The item Load watermark image allows to load from the device selected an image file named “waterm.gif”,
“waterm.jpg” or “waterm.png”, which should represent a tile to rotate by 45° and to put behind the text printed for
each A4 or PDF document produced, in order for example to identify as “confidential” reports produced . If none
of these files can be found on the support then an error message is shown. If the file size is greather of 60
Kbytes a warning message is shown to indicate that the file size is too large, but the loading is performed
anyway. If the operation succeeds it is registered into audit trail.

5.3.10.5 Documents upload

This operation allows to load into the controller customer’s procedures from an external source and manage
them locally.
9.5 DOCUMENTS UPLOAD

1. Load Program Procedure

2. Back
Table 41 – Documents upload

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 184 / 280

Cutomer’s proedures are files with *.fdm extension produced from PDF or a set of images with a conversion tool
provided by Fedegari.
By selecting the item above the management page is shown. This page is split in two parts: on the left is shown
the list of procedures already loaded into the controller, on the right is shown the list of procedures found on the
selected device.

9.5.1 LOAD PROGRAM PROCEDURE (Device = USB)

Documents loaded Documents to load
Procedure0001.fdm NewProcedure0001.fdm
Procedure0002.fdm NewProcedure0004.fdm
Procedure0003.fdm
Procedure0004.fdm
Procedure0005.fdm
Procedure0006.fdm
Procedure0006.fdm

Press CANC to delete, press TAB to switch view

Figure 71 – Load program procedure: Documents Loaded

With the up and down keys it is possible to change the item selected, with the left and right keys it is possible to
go on top of the list or at the end of the list. By pressing the CANC key the selected item will be deleted.
With the TAB key it is possible to transfer the focus to the right side of the screen as shown in the following
picture.

9.5.1 LOAD PROGRAM PROCEDURE (Device = USB)

Documents loaded Documents to load
Procedure0001.fdm NewProcedure0001.fdm
Procedure0002.fdm NewProcedure0004.fdm
Procedure0003.fdm
Procedure0004.fdm
Procedure0005.fdm
Procedure0006.fdm
Procedure0006.fdm

Press ENTER to load, press TAB to switch view

Figure 72 – Load program procedure: Documents to Load

With the up and down keys it is possible to change the item selected, with the left and right keys it is possible to
go on top of the list or at the end of the list. By pressing the ENTER key the selected item will be copied into the
controller.
With the TAB key it is possible to transfer the focus back to the left side of the screen as shown in the following
picture.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 185 / 280

5.3.10.6 Configure P/G debug log

This operation allows to enable recording inside the controller of the debug logs of Background P/Gs.
9.6 CONFIGURE P/G DEBUG LOG

1. File format (Text,Xml)

2. Max historic log queue (MB)
Log P/GB 1 [ ]
Log P/GB 2 [ ]
Log P/GB 3 [ ]
Log P/GB 4 [ ]
Log P/GB 5 [ ]
3. Back

Table 42 – Configure P/G debug log

The item File Format allows choosing between 0-Text and 1-XML.

IMPORTANT NOTE
IF XML is choosen the file produced lacks of header and trailer nodes. In order to produce a
complete XML file add the following text at the beginning:

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<data>

and add at the end the following text

</data>

The item Max file log queue (from 2MB to 99MB) allows to configure the maximum number of log files to that are
stored for each type (each file is of 1MB, from this we obtain the number of log files), this allows to control the
amount of space on the hard disk for each log.

The item P/GB 1-5 allows to enable the single debug, only if enabled in the authorization file.

5.3.10.7 Units of measure

This operation allows set the units of measure displayed on the Graphical User Interface in according to
International System (°C or bar) or Metric to Anglo-Saxon (PSI and °F).
9.7 Units of measure

1. Temperature units (0-1) 0=°C

2. Pressure units
3. Back

Table 43 Units of measure: temperature unit

Select the item 1. Temperature units in order to set the unit of temperature displayed on the graphical user
interface: 0 for degrees Celsius (°C), 1 for Fahrenheit (°C).

9.7 Units of measure

1. Temperature units
2. Pressure units (0-1) 0=bar
3. Back

Table 44 Units of misure: pressure unit

Select the item 2. Pressure units in order to set the unit of pressure displayed on the graphical user interface: 0
for bar, 1 for PSI.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 5 Page 186 / 280

5.3.10.8 Load P&ID data file

If option 26. Animated P&ID is enabled in the authorization file, this item allows to upload the file .fdi from the
device selected in order to display P&ID on the Graphical User Interface.

5.3.11 Exit
To exit from CONFIGURATION MENU select: Exit: The system will ask to restart the machine and at next boot
pending changes will be applied, such as loading software upgraded, applying new ip addresses, new
authorization parameters and so on.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 187 / 280

Section 6 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

6 RECOVERY DISK
6.1 - RECOVERY DISK FUNCTIONS
6.2 - RECOVERY DISK MENU ACCESS
6.2.1 - Recovery Disk on floppy
6.2.2 - Recovery Disk on USB key
6.2.3 - Recovery Disk startup page
6.2.4 - Compatibility issues
6.3 - RECOVERY DISK MENU NAVIGATION AND
USAGE
6.3.1 - Main menu
6.3.2 - Software installation
6.3.3 - Software Update
6.3.4 - Authorization management
6.3.5 - Backup
6.3.6 - Archive management
6.3.7 - System tuning
6.3.8 - Move archives

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 188 / 280

6.1 RECOVERY DISK FUNCTIONS

The RECOVERY DISK (RD) is an autobooting floppy or USB key which allows to perform a set of
operations on Thema 4 System such as:

1. Installation of a new system

2. Update of an existting system
3. Authorization management
4. Backup
5. Archive management
6. System tuning
7. Move archives (starting from version 02a)

NOTE
To use the RECOVERY DISK an external PC keyboard is needed. It is a PS2 keyboard for all
panel PC except Proface PS3650A, which requires an USB keyboard.
NOTE
For panel PC Proface PS-2000B also connect an external monitor to the VGA port and, if the
OS software version is B1 connect also a PS2 mouse.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 189 / 280

6.2 RECOVERY DISK MENU ACCESS

6.2.1 Recovery Disk on floppy
To boot the system from a Recovery Disk on floppy follow these steps:
- insert floppy disk into Panel PC floppy drive;
for panel PCs without an internal floppy drive (Siemens PC577, Proface PS3650A) plug-in an external USB
floppy drive;
- turn on the system;
- ensure that the floppy drive is the first boot device, in the list of boot devices in the BIOS;
for panel PCs with an external floppy drive the USB floppy device is generally listed as a removable device;
- restart the system;
- at the end of the boot process the Recovery disk startup page will appear (see 6.2.3) .

6.2.2 Recovery Disk on USB key

IMPORTANT NOTE
Only Panel PCs Siemens PC577, Proface PS 3650A and Allen Bradley VersaView 1500P
Ser.E are capable of booting from an USB key.

For panel PCs that are capable of booting from an USB key, follow these steps to boot from an USB key:
- plug-in the USB key that holds the Recovery Disk;
- turn on the system;
- step in the BIOS and select the USB key as boot device by moving it on top of the boot sequence (generally
the USB key is listed within the group “Hard Drive”);
- restart the system;
- at the end of the boot process the Recovery disk startup page will appear (see 6.2.3) .

IMPORTANT NOTE
Some USB keys might not boot even if they are listed within boot devices of the BIOS Setup
page. For some panel PCs there are workaround to apply in the BIOS to make them boot.

Siemens PC577
If the USB key is listed within the group “Diskette” instead of the group “Hard drive”, the
panel PC might not boot. By means of the TAB button force the USB key to appear within the
group “Hard drive”. After reboot, the system should boot from the key (see 4.2.7 for details
on the boot sequence menu).

Proface PS3650A
If the USB key is displayed in the Boot Priority Order page as Removable (“R” is appended
after the name), the panel PC might not boot. By means of the “F” button force the USB key
to be identified as “Fixed”. After reboot, the system should boot from the key (see 4.2.8 for
details on the boot sequence menu).

6.2.3 Recovery Disk startup page

At the end of the boot the Recovery Disk startup page will appear, where it is required to input an IP address that
will be temporariliy used by the system during this session.

Enter IP address
|

Figure 73 – Recovery disk startup page

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 190 / 280

IMPORTANT NOTE
The IP address has to be chosen in a way that allows operations through the network.

If the IP address is accepted the system displays the Main Menu

WARNING!!
No Login (ID and Password) is necessary to enter in Recovery Disk menu. These requires a
correct segregation of the Recovery Disk

6.2.4 Compatibility issues

There are two kind of Recovery Disk compatibility issues:
- operating system compatibility;
- software versions compatibility.

6.2.4.1 Operating system compatibility

There is a different Recovery Disk for each model of panel PC used in Thema4 system. This is due to different
drivers needed to operate each panel. The panel PC model is identified by the 5th letter in the version name of
the Recovery Disk: T4RDx0yz where x identifies the model (e.g. A for Allen Bradley, P for Proface, B for Blind
Proface, S for Siemens IL, Z for for Siemens PC 577), and where yz is the progressive version number and
letter.

REFERENCE
See document “Thema4 Control System Configuration Manual” (D/O #86727) - Section 8 Recovery
Disk for Panel PC and Recovery Disk compatibility.

6.2.4.2 Software version compatibility

Even if not mandatory, to ensure full compatibility of operations performed, it is recommended to use the
Recovery Disk version shipped in the same package of the software installed.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This becomes mandatory for system versions W27 or next which explicitly require Recovery
Disk 05a or next. Failing to observe this rule will cause a damage of the audit trail, due to a
not compatible audit trail write mode of previous Recovery Disk versions.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 191 / 280

6.3 RECOVERY DISK MENU NAVIGATION AND USAGE

To navigate into the Recovery disk menu, use the following keyboard keys:

ARROW UP select the previous menu item

ARROW DOWN select the next menu item
ENTER select the menu item, executes an action, allows modification of particular menu
items
ESC stops actions, cancel data typed but not already confirmed

Other keys are used for the “Hidden Archives Management” utility and are explained in the relative section.

6.3.1 Main menu

The following pictures show the main menus for the two version of recovery disk: 01a and 02a.
*** Fedegari Autoclavi S.p.A. ***
RECOVERY DISK 01a

1. Software installation
2. Software update
3. Authorization management
4. Backup
5. Archive management
6. System tuning
7. Exit
Table 45 - Recovery disk 01a main menu

*** Fedegari Autoclavi S.p.A. ***

RECOVERY DISK 02a

1. Software installation
2. Software update
3. Authorization management
4. Backup
5. Archive management
6. System tuning
7. Move archives
8. Exit
Table 46 - Recovery disk 02a (or later) main menu

NOTE
Note that the main menu of the version starting from 02a is slightly different because “Move
archives” item has been added.

The highlighted item is the one actually selected.

To exit from Recovery disk select Exit : the system will ask to restart the machine.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 192 / 280

6.3.2 Software installation

Selecting Software installation form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is
shown:
1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install
IP address:
Primary (y/n):
IP address:
Factory number:
OS/D configuration:
SW configuration:
P/G configuration:
2. Back
Table 47 - Software installation submenu

Using this menu it is possibile to fully install a control system by floppy disk or network. The software to be
installed is not included into Recovery Disk but can be sealed as floppy disks or as a CD (for FTP installation).
This allows the Recovery Disk tool to install every version of Thema4 system.
Before to start the installation it is necessary to fill requested data, otherwise installation will not take place.

To fill machine data it is necessary to select the row to be compiled and press ENTER. Then in the right side of
the screen will appears a prompt for data input. By pressing ENTER at the end of typing the data is saved, by
pressing ESC the data is discarded.

By selecting the second menu item and pressing ENTER it allows to input the IP address of the machine being
installed. This field accepts a data such as: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (i.e.: 90.0.1.1)
1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install 1. Install
IP address: 90.0.0.1 IP address: 90.0.1.1
Primary (y/n): Primary (y/n):
IP address: IP address:
Factory number: Factory number:
OS/D configuration: OS/D configuration:
SW configuration: SW configuration:
P/G configuration: P/G configuration:
2. Back 2. Back
Table 48 - Example of software installation (step 1) : PC primary side 1 or not primary side 2/3

By selecting the third menu item and pressing ENTER it is possibile to choose if the machine being installed is a
primary or not. This field accepts just y or n.
1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install 1. Install
IP address: 90.0.0.1 IP address: 90.0.1.1
Primary (y/n): y Primary (y/n): n
IP address: IP address:
Factory number: Factory number:
OS/D configuration: OS/D configuration:
SW configuration: SW configuration:
P/G configuration: P/G configuration:
2. Back 2. Back
Table 49 - Example of software installation (step 2) : PC primary side 1 or not primary side 2/3

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 193 / 280

If the machine is not a primary it is necessary to specify the IP address of the primary Panel PC. This field can
be edited only if the previous choice was n. This field accepts a data such as: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (i.e.: 90.0.0.1)
1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install 1. Install
IP address: 90.0.0.1 IP address: 90.0.1.1
Primary (y/n): y Primary (y/n): n
IP address: IP address: 90.0.0.1
Factory number: Factory number:
OS/D configuration: OS/D configuration:
SW configuration: SW configuration:
P/G configuration: P/G configuration:
2. Back 2. Back
Table 50 - Example of software installation (step 3) : PC primary side 1 or not primary side 2/3

In the fifth row it is necessary to insert the factory number of the machine being installed. This information is
needed just as a check because factory number is taken from the authorization installed.
1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install
IP address:
Primary (y/n):
IP address:
Factory number: NA1001AI
OS/D configuration:
SW configuration:
P/G configuration:
2. Back

Table 51 - Example of software installation (step 4)

In the next row it is necessary to insert the code of the OS/D configuration to install (i.e.: P6).
1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install
IP address:
Primary (y/n):
IP address:
Factory number:
OS/D configuration: P6
SW configuration:
P/G configuration:
2. Back
Table 52 - Example of software installation (step 5)

In the next row it is necessary to insert the code of the software configuration to install (i.e.: W12).
1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install
IP address:
Primary (y/n):
IP address:
Factory number:
OS/D configuration:
SW configuration: W12
P/G configuration:
2. Back
Table 53 - Example of software installation (step 6)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 194 / 280

In the next row it is necessary to insert the code of the library configuration to install (i.e.: K8).
1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install
IP address:
Primary (y/n):
IP address:
Factory number:
OS/D configuration:
SW configuration:
P/G configuration: K8
2. Back
Table 54 - Example of software installation (step 7)

When the form is filled it is possible to start the installation by selecting the first item and pressing ENTER.
Selecting Back and pressing ENTER the installation will be stopped.
1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. Install 1. Install
IP address: 90.0.0.1 IP address: 90.0.1.1
Primary (y/n): y Primary (y/n): n
IP address: IP address: 90.0.0.1
Factory number: NA1001AI Factory number: NA1001AI
OS/D configuration: P6 OS/D configuration: P6
SW configuration: W12 SW configuration: W12
P/G configuration: K8 P/G configuration: K8
2. Back 2. Back
Table 55 - Example of software installation (step 8) : PC primary side 1 or not primary side 2/3

Then the following menu is shown:

1.1.1 INSTALL

1. Install from floppy

2. Install from network
3. Install from USB key
4. Install from USB floppy
5. Install from USB ext.CD
6. Back
Table 56 - Example of software installation (step 9)

From this menu it is possibile to choose installation media:

Install from floppy or the installation will proceede with the set of floppy disks shipped (or created from
Install from USB floppy the CD with the operation described in section 8.2).
Install from network the installation will be done over the network (FTP protocol) and will require the
CD with the software.
Install from USB key the installation will be done from the USB key plugged and will require the disk-
on-key to be prepared as described in chapter 8.2.
Install from USB ext.CD the installation will be done directly from the CD shipped.
Table 57 - Software installation media selection

NOTE
Please note that items Install from USB key, Install from USB floppy and Install from USB ext.CD
will appear only if the corresponding device is plugged in the USB port. For this reason it is
possible than only items 1 and 2 will be available and items 3, 4 and 5 may not appear or appear
associated to different items. Moreover the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.

REFERENCE
Please refer to section 8.2 for important hints about USB devices.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 195 / 280

After choosing the media and pressing ENTER, data filled in the form are checked. The following table lists
possible errors that can be raised.

IP ADDRESS NOT SELECTED one or more IP address have not been specified
IP ADDRESS INVALID one or more IP addresses are wrong
PRIMARY NOT SELECTED kind of station has not been set
FACTORY NUMBER NOT VALID no factory numbera has been specified
OS/D NOT SELECTED no OS/D code has been specified
SW NOT SELECTED no Wx code has been specified
P/G NOT SELECTED no Kx code has been selected
Table 58 - Software installation data errors

If an error message is shown, go back to the previous page and fill requested data.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 196 / 280

6.3.2.1 Installation from floppy or Installation from USB floppy

If the item Install from floppy has been choosen and data requested have been filled then the installation
starts showing installation progress into the INSTALLATION REPORT page.

*** INSTALLATION REPORT ***

Writing MBR...
Installing bootrom (y/n):
Installing authorization (y/n):
Installing profibus (y/n):
Installing VXWORKS (y/n):
Installing PCS (y/n):
Installing FECP (y/n):
Installing JWORKS (y/n):
Installing GUI (y/n):
Installing P/G (y/n):
Table 59 - Example of software installation (step 10)

WARNING!!
The first installation step is hard disk formatting and paritioning so every data previously
saved will be erased and lost forever.

Items into installation reports appear one by one as the installation proceeds. The following table shows
the meaning of each one and actions that can be done:

Writing MBR… Hard disk formatting and partitioning. On the right side of the screen appears a
message about operation result. If the operation fails it is not possibile to procede
anymore.
Installing bootrom Bootrom installation on hard disk. On the right side of the screen appears the message
(y/n) “Insert disk and strike a key”. Insert the requested floppy and press ENTER to start
installation. Until installation does not end successfully (for example because the wrong
disk has been inserted) the system will continue asking to continue or stop installation
(y o n). To stop installation process insert n. In this case the system won’t be properly
installed and will be necessary to fix the installation or restart from the beginning.
Installing Installation of the authorization on hard disk, but only if the machine being installed is a
authorization (y/n) primary. Operations sequence is the same as above.
Installing profibus Installation of profibus configuration on hard disk, but only if the machine being installed
(y/n) is a primary. Operations sequence is the same as above. The file to be installed is on
the same disk as authorization so will not be necessary to change it.
Installing VXWORKS Installation of operating system on hard disk. Operations sequence is the same as
(y/n) above. If the software to be installed requires more than one disk at the end of every
disk will appear the message “insert disk N as strike a key”. If the wrong disk is inserted
the message will appear again. To stop installation press ESC.
Installing PCS (y/n) Installation of PCS on hard disk. Operations sequence is the same as above.
Installing FECP (y/n) Installation of FECP communication protocol on hard disk. Operations sequence is the
same as above.
Installing JWORKS Installation of Java Virtual Machine JWORKS on hard disk. Operations sequence is the
(y/n) same as above.
Installing GUI (y/n) Installation of GUI communication protocol on hard disk. Operations sequence is the
same as above.
Installing P/G (y/n) Installation of P/G library on hard disk. Operations sequence is the same as above.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 197 / 280

At the end of the installation process the INSTALLATION REPORT looks as below for a primary installation.
*** INSTALLATION REPORT ***

Writing MBR... done

Installing bootrom (y/n): done
Installing authorization (y/n): installation complete
Installing profibus (y/n): installation complete
Installing VXWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing PCS (y/n): installation complete
Installing FECP (y/n): installation complete
Installing JWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing GUI (y/n): installation complete
Installing P/G (y/n): installation complete

Installation terminated, strike a key to continue

Table 60 - Installation report (1)

At the end of the installation process the INSTALLATION REPORT looks as below for a not primary installation.
*** INSTALLATION REPORT ***

Writing MBR... done

Installing bootrom (y/n): done
Installing VXWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing JWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing GUI (y/n): installation complete

Installation terminated, strike a key to continue

Table 61 - Installation report (2)

By pressing a key the previous menu is shown.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 198 / 280

6.3.2.2 Installation from network

If the item Install from network has been choosen and data requested have been filled then the system asks for
FTP connection parameters. Insert IP address of the host PC, FTP user name, FTP password.

REFERENCE
For further informations on FTP configuration refer to section 8.

If Ethernet connection is ok and if FTP server is properly configured the installation starts immediately without
requiring any action to the operator.
If something goes wrong during the installation of a software element then the system ask to retry or cancel the
operation (y or n).

WARNING!!
The first installation step is hard disk formatting and paritioning so every data previously
saved will be erased and lost forever.

Items into installation reports appear one by one as the installation proceeds. The following table shows the
meaning of each one and actions that can be done:

Writing MBR… Hard disk formatting and partitioning. On the right side of the screen appears a
message about operation result. If the operation fails it is not possibile to procede
anymore.
Installing bootrom Bootrom installation on hard disk. Until installation does not end successfully (for
(y/n) example because the wrong disk has been inserted) the system will continue asking to
continue or stop installation (y or n). To stop installation process insert n. In this case
the system won’t be properly installed and will be necessary to fix the installation or
restart from the beginning.
Installing Installation of the authorization on hard disk, but only if the machine being installed is a
authorization (y/n) primary. Operations sequence is the same as above.
Installing profibus Installation of profibus configuration on hard disk, but only if the machine being installed
(y/n) is a primary. Operations sequence is the same as above.
Installing VXWORKS Installation of operating system on hard disk. Operations sequence is the same as
(y/n) above.
Installing PCS (y/n) Installation of PCS on hard disk. Operations sequence is the same as above.
Installing FECP (y/n) Installation of FECP communication protocol on hard disk. Operations sequence is the
same as above.
Installing JWORKS Installation of Java Virtual Machine JWORKS on hard disk. Operations sequence is the
(y/n) same as above.
Installing GUI (y/n) Installation of GUI communication protocol on hard disk. Operations sequence is the
same as above.
Installing P/G (y/n) Installation of P/G library on hard disk. Operations sequence is the same as above.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 199 / 280

At the end of the installation process the INSTALLATION REPORT looks as below for a primary installation.
*** INSTALLATION REPORT ***

Writing MBR... done

Installing bootrom (y/n): done
Installing authorization (y/n): installation complete
Installing profibus (y/n): installation complete
Installing VXWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing PCS (y/n): installation complete
Installing FECP (y/n): installation complete
Installing JWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing GUI (y/n): installation complete
Installing P/G (y/n): installation complete

Installation terminated, strike a key to continue

Table 62 - Installation report (3)

At the end of the installation process the INSTALLATION REPORT looks as below for a not primary installation.
*** INSTALLATION REPORT ***

Writing MBR... done

Installing bootrom (y/n): done
Installing VXWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing JWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing GUI (y/n): installation complete

Installation terminated, strike a key to continue

Table 63 - Installation report (4)

By pressing a key the previuos menu is shown.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 200 / 280

6.3.2.3 Installation from USB key or Installation from USB ext.CD

If the item Install from USB key or Install from USB ext.CD has been choosen and data requested have been
filled then the installation starts immediately without requiring any action to the operator.
If something goes wrong during the installation of a software element then the system ask to retry or cancel the
operation (y or n).

WARNING!!
The first installation step is hard disk formatting and paritioning so every data previously
saved will be erased and lost forever.

Items into installation reports appear one by one as the installation proceeds. The following table shows the
meaning of each one and actions that can be done:

Writing MBR… Hard disk formatting and partitioning. On the right side of the screen appears a
message about operation result. If the operation fails it is not possibile to procede
anymore.
Installing bootrom Bootrom installation on hard disk. Until installation does not end successfully (for
(y/n) example because the wrong disk has been inserted) the system will continue asking to
continue or stop installation (y or n). To stop installation process insert n. In this case
the system won’t be properly installed and will be necessary to fix the installation or
restart from the beginning.
Installing Installation of the authorization on hard disk, but only if the machine being installed is a
authorization (y/n) primary. Operations sequences is the same as above.
Installing profibus Installation of profibus configuration on hard disk, but only if the machine being installed
(y/n) is a primary. Operations sequences is the same as above.
Installing VXWORKS Installation of operating system on hard disk. Operations sequence is the same as
(y/n) above.
Installing PCS (y/n) Installation of PCS on hard disk. Operations sequence is the same as above.
Installing FECP (y/n) Installation of FECP communication protocol on hard disk. Operations sequence is the
same as above.
Installing JWORKS Installation of Java Virtual Machine JWORKS on hard disk. Operations sequence is the
(y/n) same as above.
Installing GUI (y/n) Installation of GUI communication protocol on hard disk. Operations sequence is the
same as above.
Installing P/G (y/n) Installation of P/G library on hard disk. Operations sequence is the same as above.

At the end of the installation process the INSTALLATION REPORT looks as below for a primary installation.
*** INSTALLATION REPORT ***

Writing MBR... done

Installing bootrom (y/n): done
Installing authorization (y/n): installation complete
Installing profibus (y/n): installation complete
Installing VXWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing PCS (y/n): installation complete
Installing FECP (y/n): installation complete
Installing JWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing GUI (y/n): installation complete
Installing P/G (y/n): installation complete

Installation terminated, strike a key to continue

Table 64 - Installation report (5)

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 201 / 280

At the end of the installation process the INSTALLATION REPORT looks as below for a not primary installation.
*** INSTALLATION REPORT ***

Writing MBR... done

Installing bootrom (y/n): done
Installing VXWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing JWORKS (y/n): installation complete
Installing GUI (y/n): installation complete

Installation terminated, strike a key to continue

Table 65 - Installation report (6)

By pressing a key the previous menu is shown.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 202 / 280

6.3.3 Software Update

Selecting Software update form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
2 SOFTWARE UPDATE

1. PCS installation
2. P/G installation
3. FECP installation
4. GUI installation
5. JWORKS installation
6. VXWORKS installation
7. BOOTROM installation
8. Back
Table 66 - Software update submenu

REFERENCE
This submenu provides the same functionalities of Configuration Menu item Software installation &
update.
Please refer to section 5.3.2 for further informations.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 203 / 280

6.3.4 Authorization management

Selecting Software update form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
3 AUTHORIZATION MANAGEMENT

1. Load authorization from floppy

2. Load authorization from network
3. Load authorization from USB key
4. Load authorization from USB floppy
5. Load authorization from USB ext.CD
3. Back
Table 67 - Authorization management submenu

REFERENCE
This submenu provides the same functionalities of Configuration Menu item Authorization
management.
Please refer to section 5.3.8 for further informations.

NOTE
Please note that items Load authorization from USB key, Load authorization from USB floppy and
Load authorization from USB ext.CD will appear only if the corresponding device is plugged in the
USB port. For this reason it is possible than only items 1 and 2 will be available and items 3, 4 and
5 may not appear or appear associated to different items.
Moreover the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.

REFERENCE
Please refer to section 8.2 for important hints about USB devices.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 204 / 280

6.3.5 Backup
Selecting Backup form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
4 BACKUP

1. Backup Current Hist Hidden

Configuration [ ] [ ] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [ ] [ ]
Programs [ ] [ ] [ ]
Maintenance [ ] [ ] [ ]
Access management [ ] [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ] [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ] [ ] [ ]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] ZIP format
2. Back
Table 68 - Backup submenu

REFERENCE
This submenu provides the same functionalities of Configuration Menu item Backup.
Please refer to section 5.3.8 for further informations.

NOTE
ZIP format is available only starting from version 02a, Backup job item is available starting from
Recovery Disk version 03 and Hidden column is available starting from Recovery Disk version 07.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 205 / 280

6.3.6 Archive management

Selecting Archive management form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is
shown:
5 ARCHIVE MANAGEMENT

1. Reset Current Hist Hidden

Configuration [ ] [ ] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [ ] [ ]
Programs [ ] [ ] [ ]
Maintenance [ ] [ ] [ ]
Access management [ ] [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ] [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ] [ ]
2. Back
Table 69 - Archive management submenu

REFERENCE
This submenu provides the same functionalities of Configuration Menu item Archive management.
Please refer to section 5.3.9 for further informations.

NOTE
Backup job item is available starting from Recovery Disk version 03 and Hidden column is available
starting from Recovery Disk version 07.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 206 / 280

6.3.7 System tuning

Selecting System tuning from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
6 SYSTEM TUNING

1. Save settings
Watchdog enabled(y/n) y
I/O task timeout(2-99) 20
Door task timeout(2-99) 50
Esecutor task timeout(2-99) 10
Steam gener.task timeout(2-99) 10
2. Back
Table 70 - System tuning submenu (up to version 03)

6 SYSTEM TUNING

1. Save settings
Watchdog enabled(y/n) y
I/O task timeout(2-99) 20
Door task timeout(2-99) 50
Esecutor task timeout(2-99) 10
Steam gener.task timeout(2-99) 10
Debug log level(0-3) 3
2. Back
Table 71 - System tuning submenu (from version 04)

This submenu allows to change some parameters that affect how the SYSTEM WATCHDOG ERROR alarm
works.

WARNING!!
These parameters work on a critical section of internal code of the process control software.
Don’t change these values unless Fedagari asks to.

When the page is shown, values actually used by the system are shown. To change a parameter select its row
and press ENTER. In the right half of the screen appears a prompt that allows to input a new value. By pressing
ENTER the new value will be accepted, by pressing ESC the old value will be restored. Changed value will be
retained only after an explicit save command.

6 SYSTEM TUNING

1. Save settings
Watchdog enabled(y/n) y
I/O task timeout(2-99) 20
Door task timeout(2-99) 50
Esecutor task timeout(2-99) 10
Steam gener.task timeout(2-99) 10
Debug log level(0-3) 3
2. Back
Table 72 - Changing watchdog parameter

The parameter “Watchdog enabled” can be enabled or not (y or n).

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 207 / 280

6 SYSTEM TUNING

1. Save settings
Watchdog enabled(y/n) y
I/O task timeout(2-99) 20
Door task timeout(2-99) 50
Esecutor task timeout(2-99) 10
Steam gener.task timeout(2-99) 10
Debug log level(0-3) 3
2. Back
Table 73 - Changing I/O task timeout parameter

The parameter “I/O task timeout” is the timeout of the task wich manages inputs and outputs.
6 SYSTEM TUNING

1. Save settings
Watchdog enabled(y/n) y
I/O task timeout(2-99) 20
Door task timeout(2-99) 50
Esecutor task timeout(2-99) 10
Steam gener.task timeout(2-99) 10
Debug log level(0-3) 3
2. Back
Table 74 - Changing Door task timeout parameter

The parameter “Door task timeout” is the timeout of the task wich manages sterilizer doors.
6 SYSTEM TUNING

1. Save settings
Watchdog enabled(y/n) y
I/O task timeout(2-99) 20
Door task timeout(2-99) 50
Esecutor task timeout(2-99) 10
Steam gener.task timeout(2-99) 10
Debug log level(0-3) 3
2. Back
Table 75 - Changing Esecutor task parameter

The parameter “Esecutor task timeout” is the timeout of the task wich manages programs execution.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 208 / 280

6 SYSTEM TUNING

1. Save settings
Watchdog enabled(y/n) y
I/O task timeout(2-99) 20
Door task timeout(2-99) 50
Esecutor task timeout(2-99) 10
Steam gener.task timeout(2-99) 10
Debug log level(0-3) 3
2. Back
Table 76 - Changing steam generator parameter

The parameter “Steam generator task timeout” is the timeout of the task wich manages steam generator (if
present).
6 SYSTEM TUNING

1. Save settings
Watchdog enabled(y/n) y
I/O task timeout(2-99) 20
Door task timeout(2-99) 50
Esecutor task timeout(2-99) 10
Steam gener.task timeout(2-99) 10
Debug log level(0-3) 3
2. Back
Table 77 - Changing debug log level

The parameter “Debug log level” is the level of internal task scheduling log.

After changing parameters as needed new values can be saved or lost. By selecting the item Save settings and
pressing ENTER new values will be saved, or otherwise by selecting the item Back new values will be lost.

6 SYSTEM TUNING

1. Save settings
Watchdog enabled(y/n) y
I/O task timeout(2-99) 20
Door task timeout(2-99) 50
Esecutor task timeout(2-99) 10
Steam gener.task timeout(2-99) 10
Debug log level(0-3) 3
2. Back
Table 78 - Saving parameter

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 209 / 280

6.3.8 Move archives

“Move archives” is a functionality added starting from Recovery Disk version 02a and it works with
every Thema4 version. It allows to move archived files in special folders that the Thema4 can’t access.
This is useful to empty archives list shown by GUI without removing files from the controller hard disk. File
moved in the “hidden” folder are not visible by the GUI and this allows to manage a reduced number of files in
normal working sessions. This operation should be performed on a regular basis to keep comfortable the
number of archived files to manage with GUI. When, for any reason, it is necessary to access a file moved in
the “hidden” folder it is possible to move it back in the “visible” folder and restart the system.
A thing to remember is that backup and restore procedures and archive management procedures work only in
the “visible” portion of archives.

NOTE
This function is present in the Thema4 GUI, since software version W28.

6.3.8.1 Move archives menu: list of the archives

Selecting Move archives from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following page is shown (however the
numbers shown will be different):

7 MOVE ARCHIVES

Data category Visibile Hidden

Configuration archive : system 10 0
“ : factory 20 0
“ : calibration 0 0
“ : scaling 8 0
“ : configuration alarms 8 0
“ : alarms definition 8 0
“ : IO definition 8 0
“ : ALI definition 8 0
“ : ALO definition 8 0
“ : DLI definition 8 0
“ : DLO definition 8 0
Cycle archive 12 0
Program archive 33 12
Maintenance archive 7 0
Login archive 45 0
Process reports 275 234
Backup jobs archive 0 0

Press ENTER button to select a data category, ESC to go back to previous page

Figure 74 – Move archives submenu

This page summarizes the number of archive files in “visible” and “hidden” folders for each data category.
ARROW DOWN ad ARROW UP keys allow to select a specific data category, pressing ENTER it is possible to
access the browser for the category selected and pressing ESC it is possible to go back to previous menu.

NOTE
Please note that Backup jobs archive data category will be available only for Recovery Disk version
03. Moreover it will contain files only if exected on systems version W23 or greater.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 210 / 280

The table below explains in details the data categories:

Item name data type filename

Configuration archive: system System parameters …sys.cnf
Configuration archive: factory Factory parameters …pfabb.cnf
Configuration archive: calibration Calibration …calib.cnf
Configuration archive: scaling Scaling coefficients …scal.cnf
Configuration archive: Configuration alarms …cfall.cnf
configuration alarms
Configuration archive: Alarms parametrization …aldef.cnf
alarms definition
Configuration archive: IO definition Equipment configuration …iodef.cnf
Configuration archive: Analog input configuration …alidef.cnf
ALI definition
Configuration archive: Analog output configuration …alodef.cnf
ALO definition
Configuration archive: Digital input configuration …dlidef.cnf
DLI definition
Configuration archive: Digital output configuration …dlodef.cnf
DLO definition
Cycle archive Cycles …xxx.cic
Program archive Programs …xxx.prg
Maintenance archive Maintenance configuration …manut.cnf
Login archive Global login parameters and logins …key.cnf
…keyg.cnf
…keyu.cnf
Process report archive Process reports xxx.log
Backup jobs archive Backup jobs …job.cnf
Table 79 - Archives data categories

6.3.8.2 Access to an archive and browse visible and hidden folders

By selecting a specific item and pressing ENTER a small browser is shown that allows to move those data from
“visible” to “hidden” folder and viceversa.

7 MOVE ARCHIVES [ “ : item]

050127143729aldef.cnf 050204082120aldef.cnf
050207182029aldef.cnf 050205182014aldef.cnf
050207183029aldef.cnf 050206104533aldef.cnf
050209182029aldef.cnf
050211082029aldef.cnf
050211122017aldef.cnf
050211122044aldef.cnf
050211152112aldef.cnf
050215080812aldef.cnf

Press TAB button to toggle selection window, SPACE to start and stop multiple selections,
BACKSPACE to see explicit daytime, ENTER to move to the other side, ESC to go back

Figure 75 – Move archives submenu

The page is composed by two windows. The left windows displays file contained in the “visible” folder, the right
windows displays file contained in the “hidden” folder. The windows that owns “focus” is drawn with a shadow
around it telling the user that the window will react to keyboard keys.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 211 / 280

By pressing the TAB button it is possible to toggle focus from left to right window and viceversa.

7 MOVE ARCHIVES [ “ : item]

050127143729aldef.cnf 050204082120aldef.cnf
050207182029aldef.cnf 050205182014aldef.cnf
050207183029aldef.cnf 050206104533aldef.cnf
050209182029aldef.cnf
050211082029aldef.cnf
050211122017aldef.cnf
050211122044aldef.cnf
050211152
12aldef.cnf
050215080812aldef.cnf

Press TAB button to toggle selection window, SPACE to start and stop multiple selections,
BACKSPACE to see explicit daytime, ENTER to move to the other side, ESC to go back

Figure 76 – Changing focused window

The scrollbar inside each window will be visible only if there are too many elements to display and will provide a
visual information of how many files there are.

To move through file list just use ARROW DOWN and ARROW UP keys. To simplify navigation when there are
many files it is possible to use also ARROW LEFT to go to the top of the list and ARROW RIGHT to go to the
end of the list.

6.3.8.3 Display files information

Pressing BACKSPACE over a specific file shows a popup window that displays in a more readable format the
date and time of that file. This feature does not work for process reports that are simply numbered in a
progressive way. To hide the popup window press ESC.

7 MOVE ARCHIVES [ “ : item]

050127143729aldef.cnf 050204082120aldef.cnf
050207182029aldef.cnf 050205182014aldef.cnf
050207183029aldef.cnf 050206104533aldef.cnf
050209182029aldef.cnf
050211082029aldef.cnf
07 FEB 2005 18:20:29
050211122017aldef.cnf
050211122044aldef.cnf
050211152112aldef.cnf
050215080812aldef.cnf

Press TAB button to toggle selection window, SPACE to start and stop multiple selections,
BACKSPACE to see explicit daytime, ENTER to move to the other side, ESC to go back

Figure 77 – View explicit date and time

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 212 / 280

6.3.8.4 Files selection

It is possible to move a single file at a time or many files at a time. To select a group of files press the
SPACEBAR (on some keyboards also ALT button works) and select files with ARROWs buttons. To stop
multiple selection press SPACEBAR again; this will step back to single file selection mode.

7 MOVE ARCHIVES [ “ : item]

050127143729aldef.cnf 050204082120aldef.cnf
050207182029aldef.cnf 050205182014aldef.cnf
050207183029aldef.cnf 050206104533aldef.cnf
050209182029aldef.cnf
050211082029aldef.cnf
050211122017aldef.cnf
050211122044aldef.cnf
050211152112aldef.cnf
050215080812aldef.cnf

Press TAB button to toggle selection window, SPACE to start and stop multiple selections,
BACKSPACE to see explicit daytime, ENTER to move to the other side, ESC to go back

Figure 78 – Multiple selections

When desired files have been selected it is possible to move them to the other side by pressing ENTER.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 213 / 280

6.3.8.5 Moving files

To move a single file: select the file with ARROWs key and press ENTER to move it.
To move multiple files: select the first file with ARROWs key; press SPACEBAR to enable multiple selection
mode; use ARROWs to select last file, press ENTER to move them.
During transfer a popup window is shown displaying the percentage of completion.

7 MOVE ARCHIVES [ “ : item]

050127143729aldef.cnf 050204082120aldef.cnf
050207182029aldef.cnf 050205182014aldef.cnf
050207183029aldef.cnf 050206104533aldef.cnf
050209182029aldef.cnf
Moving files
050211082029aldef.cnf
30.3%
050211122017aldef.cnf
050211122044aldef.cnf
050211152112aldef.cnf
050215080812aldef.cnf

Press TAB button to toggle selection window, SPACE to start and stop multiple selections,
BACKSPACE to see explicit daytime, ENTER to move to the other side, ESC to go back

Figure 79 – File transfer

At the end of the transfer windows are reloaded and the new content is shown.

7 MOVE ARCHIVES [ “ : item]

050127143729aldef.cnf 050204082120aldef.cnf
050207182029aldef.cnf 050205182014aldef.cnf
050207183029aldef.cnf 050206104533aldef.cnf
050209182029aldef.cnf 050209182029aldef.cnf
050211082029aldef.cnf 050211082029aldef.cnf
050211122017aldef.cnf 050211122017aldef.cnf
050211122044aldef.cnf 050211122044aldef.cnf
050211152112aldef.cnf 050211152112aldef.cnf
050215080812aldef.cnf

Press TAB button to toggle selection window, SPACE to start and stop multiple selections,
BACKSPACE to see explicit daytime, ENTER to move to the other side, ESC to go back

Figure 80 – Data reloaded

To move back files from “hidden” folder to “visible” folder press TAB button to move the focus to the right window
and repeat previous steps.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 214 / 280

6.3.8.6 Special uses of Move archives

“Move archives” can be used to perform particular operations or solve particular problems. The special
operations that can be carried with “Move archives” facility are:
- Reset a portion of historical data
- Solve the “GUI hanging” problem at startup for versions previous than W15
6.3.8.6.1 Reset a portion of historical data
The “Archive management” operation allows to clear both actual than historical data: it deletes all actual files
and/or all historical files. But how is it possible to delete just a piece of historical data? Using “Move archives”
operation it is possible to delete just a piece of them and this operation can be carried entirely using the
Recovery Disk.

Follow these steps:

1 - Initial status Initial condition
Visible Hidden
file1
file2
file3

2- Use “Move archives” to move to After move archives

Visible Hidden
hidden folders the files to keep;
file3 file1
file2

3- Use “Archive management” to reset After archive reset

Visible Hidden
files that have been left in the “visible”
archive folder; file1
file2

4 - Use “Move archives” to move back After move archives

Visible Hidden
archived files from “hidden” folder to
“visible” folder. file1
file2

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 215 / 280

The following table shows the correspondence between “Archive management” categories and “Move archive”
categories.

Archive management Move archives

Current Hist.
Configuration [ ] [x] Configuration archive: system
Configuration archive: factory
Configuration archive: calibration
Configuration archive: scaling
Configuration archive: configuration alarms
Configuration archive: alarms definition
Configuration archive: IO definition
Configuration archive: ALI definition
Configuration archive: ALO definition
Configuration archive: DLI definition
Configuration archive: DLO definition
Cycles [ ] [x] Cycle archive
Programs [ ] [x] Program archive
Maintenance [ ] [x] Maintenance archive
Access Management [ ] [x] Login archive
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [x] Process report archive
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ] [ ] This feature is disabled at the moment
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ] Backup jobs

Table 80 - “Archive management” and “Move archive” categories

6.3.8.6.2 Solve the “GUI hanging” problem at startup for versions previous than W15
Thema4 versions previous than W15 can freeze during startup if a limit of about 600 files are stored in an
archive category. To solve this problem each archive category must contain less than 600 files. To achieve this
result two alternative periodical operations can be performed:
solution A) perform a backup and then a reset of archives
solution B) move files exceeding the limit to the “hidden” folder

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 6 Page 216 / 280

This page is left intentionally blank

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 7 Page 217 / 280

Section 7 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

7 CD SOFTWARE SUPPLY
7.1 - CD SOFTWARE BACKUP PACKAGE
7.2 - CD IDENTIFICATION
7.2.1 - Software backup CD identification
7.3 - CD INTERNAL STRUCTURE
7.3.1 - Software CD internal structure
7.4 - USING THE CD FOR NETWORK INSTALLATION
7.5 - DISKS CREATION FROM CD
7.6 - TRANSFERRING CD ON A USB
7.7- SOFTWARE PATCH KIT
7.7.1 - Software Patch Installation

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 7 Page 218 / 280

7.1 CD SOFTWARE BACKUP PACKAGE

CD software backup is provided for each sterilizer.

IMPORTANT NOTE
CD Software backup package is unique for each sterilizer and is identified by factory number
(NF).

NOTE - USER MANUAL (PDF File)

Since software version W27.1, the CD contains also the copy of the User's Manual, in pdf format.

NOTE - FAT data backup of sterilizer

Since July 2007, for the machines that have been tested in Fedegari (F.A.T.) also the testing
backup data are stored on the CD, by means of 2 files: file.bzk that contains the backup summary
and file.000 that contains the backup data in compressed zip format.

The software package is composed of:

- THEMA4 Software KIT
- THEMA4 software for optional KIT released with the sterilizer.

REFERENCE
For the complete list of the software KIT released and the contents of each software KIT see
the chapter 1.8 on the document THEMA4 Control System User Manual of the Wxx.y software
version installed on the machine.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 7 Page 219 / 280

7.2 CD IDENTIFICATION
7.2.1 Software backup CD identification
For each sterilizer is shipped a CD which is specific for that particular machine.
From the label it is possible to identify the sterilizer and software components stored in the CD. Exact codes of
software elements can be found in the HW and SW Configuration Manual document using codes printed on the
CD label.

FACTORY NUMBER
NA1011AI Sterilizer factory number

APPLICATION SW VERSION - Wx
The Configuration Manual document shows
SW Version: W12 which subcode of FECP, GUI, PCS and
OS Driver: P8
PG library: K13 JWORKS software components belong to Wx.
SW\HW Inst. Manual
User's Manual
OPERATING SYSTEM/DRIVER VERSION
The Configuration Manual document shows
wich subcode of Bootrom and VXWORKS
O.S. Driver components belong to Px.

PHASE GROUPS LIBRARY VERSION

The Configuration Manual document shows
wich subcode of P/G library belongs to Kx.

INSTALLATION MANUAL
USER'S MANUAL The HW\SW Installation Manual in PDF
The User's Manual in PDF format is format is stored in the CD.
stored in the CD, since SW version
W27.1 ON-LINE MANUAL
The On line Manuals is related to a specific
software version which is reported on the label
of the CD.

Figure 81 – Software CD Fac-simile

NOTE
Starting from W30, on-line manual are not distributed on a separate CD but on the Software backup
CD. They must be installed on the controller and Remote GUI (TH4RStart) will download them at
run time along with the GUI software.

NOTE
Starting from W30, Remote GUI is not distributed on a separate CD but on the Software backup CD.
It is delivered for each sterilizer, but will work only if the sterilizer owns Remote GUI licenses.
The installation provided installs TH4RStart, which is a launcher that allows to download at run time
the GUI software on the Windows PC.

NOTE
Starting from W30, FTP Server is not distributed on a separate floppy disk but on the Software
backup CD.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 7 Page 220 / 280

7.3 CD INTERNAL STRUCTURE

7.3.1 Software CD internal structure
The root of the CD contains folders and files related to software components to be installed on the controller, to
software to be installed on a Windows based PC and PDF files of documentation.
An example of the internal CD structure is the following:

Figure 82 – Generic CD internal structure

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 7 Page 221 / 280

The following table describes to which components belong elements that can be found in the root of the CD:
Element Description Component Purpose
BROM Folder of bootrom software OS/D To be installed on the
bootrom Bootrom software sterilizer
VXWORKS Folder of O.S. software
vx.ins O.S. installation script
Pxx.ins (A,S,D,B,Z) Script for identification of O.S.
PCS Folder of PCS software Wx
pcs.ins PCS installation script
FECP Folder of FECP software
fecp.ins FECP installation script
GUI Folder of GUI software
gui.ins GUI installation script
JWORKS Folder of JWORKS software
java.ins JWORKS installation script
PGLIB Folder of P/G library software Kx
pglib.ins P/G library installation script
Kxx.ins Script for library identification
MANENG Folder of on-line manuals On-line manuals
maneng.ins On-line manuals installation script
NAxxxxyy Folder for sterilizer’s specific files sterilizer specific To be installed on the
th4.aut Authorization file software sterilizer
config.ply Profibus card configuration file
apio.ins Profibus card installation script
yymmddhhmmss.bzk Backup identification Backup of sterilizer’s To be restored on the
yymmddhhmmss.000 Backup content data after FAT sterilizer
*TH4_IM*.pdf Installation Manual Documentation in To be viewed on a
*TH4_UM_Wx.pdf User Manual PDF format Windows PC
FTP_SERVER Folder of FTP Server software FTP Server for To be installed on a
network backup or Windows PC
installation
REMOTE_GUI Folder of Remote GUI software TH4RStart and JRE
CERTIFICATE Folder that contains the public thema4.cer To be imported into
certificate file to challenge the Acrobat Reader of a
signature of PDF files customer’s Windows PC
Table 81 – Relation between folders and software components

The CD is ready “as is” for installation on the sterilizer by means of network or internal CD (if supported), for
details see paragraph 7.4.
For installation on the sterilizer using floppies, it is necessary to generate them from the CD, for details see
paragraph 7.5.
For installation on the sterilizer using an USB disk-on-key, it is necessary to copy the content of the CD on it, for
details see paragraph 7.6.

Software to be installed or documentation to be viewed on Windows PC can be reached inserting the CD in a

CDROM drive.

For details on Remote GUI installation (TH4RStart) see chapter 9.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 7 Page 222 / 280

7.4 USING THE CD FOR NETWORK INSTALLATION

To perform FTP installation by means of CD support, the FTP Server on the host machine must be configured
such a way that the CD drive of the host machine becomes usable through the network.
If host PC CD drive is the unit D:\ the FTP server must be configured with the following parameters:
User name: <whatever you like>
Password: <whatever you like>
Home directory: D:\
Restrictions: no restrictions

User name and password can be whatever desired. Once this configuration has been done it is possible to
proceed to installation or software update. Remember to start FTP server on the host machine.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 7 Page 223 / 280

7.5 DISKS CREATION FROM CD

To install or update the system with floppies it is necessary to create them from the CD. To create floppies
needed to install a software element it is necessary to get as many disks than “disk” subdirectory can be found in
the folder of that software element (in the example below 2 disks).

Into each disk must be copied the content of the corresponding subdirectory “disk”. In the example above into
the first disk must be copied the content of the disk1 directory, in the second disk must be copied the content of
the disk2 directory. Disks content becomes:

disk 1 disk 2

Now it is possibile to use disks created to install the software element with floppies using the CONFIGURATION
MENU or the RECOVERY DISK.
The following table shows an example of disks that can be extracted form a CD:

CD directory CD subdirectory Software element Disk name

BROM disk1 Bootrom T4ROM01c (1 of 1)
VXWORKS disk1 O.S. VXWORKS T4OS04c (1 of 4)
disk2 T4OS04c (2 of 4)
disk3 T4OS04c (3 of 4)
disk4 T4OS04c (4 of 4)
FECP disk1 Communication protocol T4FECP02d (1 of 1)
FECP
GUI disk1 Graphical user interface GUI T4GUI02e (1 of 7)
disk2 T4GUI02e (2 of 7)
disk3 T4GUI02e (3 of 7)
disk4 T4GUI02e (4 of 7)
disk5 T4GUI02e (5 of 7)
disk6 T4GUI02e (6 of 7)
disk7 T4GUI02e (7 of 7)
JWORKS disk1 Java Virtual Machine JWORKS 4.0 (1 of 5)
disk2 JWORKS JWORKS 4.0 (2 of 5)
disk3 JWORKS 4.0 (3 of 5)
disk4 JWORKS 4.0 (4 of 5)
disk5 JWORKS 4.0 (5 of 5)
PCS disk1 Process control software T4PCS02e (1 of 2)
disk2 PCS T4PCS02e (2 of 2)
PGLIB disk1 P/G library T4LIB12a (1 of 1)
NA1011AI disk1 Authorization and profibus Authorization disk
configuration
Table 82 - Example of disks to be extracted from CD

REFERENCE
To find exact codes of software elements for a generic sterilizer see section 7.2.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 7 Page 224 / 280

7.6 TRANSFERRING CD ON A USB KEY

To install or update the system with an USB key it is necessary to put the content of the CD on it. It is required to
use a USB key that can host entirely the CD content so, before to start the procedure, check the size of the CD
and get a USB key large enough (normally 32 MB should be enough, for future versions maybe more space will
be required).

To transfer the CD content in the USB key simply copy the entire content of the CD in the USB key.

NOTE
Folders and files related to software to be installed or documents to be viewed on Windows PC can
be left off the disk-on-key.

7.7 SOFTWARE PATCH KIT

The THEMA4 PATCH KIT is a partial release (CD PATCH BACKUP) of only some software programs, modified
to fix some problems, applicable to a defined version of a software products.
The THEMA4 PATCH KIT, for a defined software program, is composed of these items:
- CD PATCH BACKUP with patches Wxxy/Pzzz (where Wxxy is version/release of the software product
and Pzzz the patch progressive number)
- PATCH DOCUMENTS:
 Patch Configuration Manual
 Problem remedy documents referred to all FRs fixed by means of the patch released
 Patch validation certificate
While CD SOFTWARE BACKUP contains all the un-patched versions of Thema4 software, the CD PATCH
BACKUP contains only the software programs “patched” of defined software products (Wxxy, OS/Dxxy,..).

7.7.1 Software Patch Installation

The software contained on the CD PATCH BACKUP has to be installed with the same tools (Configuration Menu
or Recovery Disk) and menu items (Software update) of the full software version.

NOTE
By the moment that the patch does not contain all the software components but just some
components changed, it is not possible to install it using the menu item Software Complete Update.

A patch must be installed always on top of the original product version/revision: patch Wxxy/P0n (where n is the
number of the release) has to be installed on the top of the original version Wxxy. If the Wxx is already installed
it is not necessary to reinstall it again.
A patch can be installed on top of a previous patch or instead of a previous patch, because patch is “cumulative”:
the latest patch contains also previous patch.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 225 / 280

Section 8 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

8 MISCELLANEOUS
8.1 - FTP SERVER CONFIGURATION
8.1.1 - Ethernet connection
8.1.2 - Connection check
8.1.3 - Configuring an FTP server
8.2 - USB DEVICES
8.2.1 - General informations on USB
8.2.2 - Supported USB
8.2.3 - Restrictions on number of USB
8.3 - UPGCEPRN V1.5 for THERMAL PRINTER
CUSTOM TPT112HP INSTALLATION
8.3.1 - Installation procedure
8.4 - FLASHINGUTILITY INSTALLATION
8.4.1 – Installation procedure
8.5 - UPGCEPRN V2.14 for THERMAL PRINTER
CUSTOM PLUS4 INSTALLATION
8.5.1 – Installation procedure
8.6 - THEMA4-VHP STERIS PROFIBUS/MPI
INTERFACE INSTALLATION
8.6.1 - Installation by replacing the Micro memory card
already programmed
8.6.2 - Installation by IDE Siemens Simatic Step 7 v5.4

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 226 / 280

8.1 FTP SERVER CONFIGURATION

8.1.1 Ethernet connection
For Recovery Disk or systems previous than W23 software release it is possible to set the IP address but there
is a fixed subnet mask that equals to 255.0.0.0. This means, for example, that if its IP address is 60.0.0.33 it will
be able to connect to every machine in the subnet 60.x.x.x. In order for the system to connect to the host PC it is
required that IP addresses are choosen such a way that Thema4 system and host PC are in the same subnet.
This can be done by changing Thema4 IP address (Stations configuration menu for CONFIGURATION MENU or
startup input box for RECOVERY DISK) or host IP address.

For systems W23 or newer it is possible both to set the subnet mask than a gateway. This allows to configure
the network as desired but, by the moment this is considered a configuration advanced and customized, the
default setting is identical to older systems and recovery disk:
subnet mask 255.0.0.0
NO GATEWAY.

It is possible to connect Thema4 system to the host by means of a direct connection or a connection through an
HUB.

Direct connection:

crossed cable

IP
60.0.0.15 IP 60.0.0.1

Figure 83 – Thema4 to Host direct connection

To achieve a direct connection a crossed cable must be used.

With this configuration it does not make sense to use a Gateway.

Connection through HUB:

2 normal cables

IP IP 60.0.0.1
60.0.0.15

Figure 84 – Thema4 to Host HUB connection

To achieve a connection through a HUB two normal cables must be used.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 227 / 280

8.1.2 Connection check

To check Ethernet connection the command ping can be used from the host machine. To execute the ping
command type cmd into Run….

then a DOS prompt appears: type ping followed by the IP addres to be checked:

If the connection is OK the screen will look like this:

Otherwise Thema 4 IP address, Host IP address and Ethernet cable must be checked.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 228 / 280

8.1.3 Configuring an FTP server

In order to allow backup or software installation over the network it is needed an FTP server running on the host
machine properly configured.
Configuration consists in the creation of an account. Must be specified:
1) user name
2) password
3) root path
4) access rights

Following figures refer to FTP server WFTP32 but, as principle, apply to every other FTP server available on the
market.

Select Security and then user/rights

Press new user and insert a username (for example C18) into textbox:

Pressing OK a password is requested (for example PIPPO):

then it is possible to specify root path.

When

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 229 / 280

installing software from CD must be selected the path of the local CDROM (for example D:\ ) or a path where
CD content has been copied.

Now the server is configured.

NOTE
It is quite normal for the system to stop for about 1 minute during network operations. This is not a
Thema 4 fault but it is related to a TCP/IP protocol feature. Also internal timeout for network
operations is about 1 minute.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 230 / 280

8.2 USB DEVICES

8.2.1 General informations on USB devices
While other systems (for example Windows) show USB devices connected and require to explicitly disable them
before to unplug, THEMA4 Control System does not.
This does not mean that it is possible to plug and unplug USB devices at any time: it is possible to unplug an
USB device only if it is not used.
Removing an USB device while the system is writing or reading on it (backup, restore or installation procedure
running) may cause the damage of the device or data loss.

8.2.2 Supported USB devices

USB devices supported are:
1. USB disk-on-key (identified as USB key in this document). This category comprises also USB static hard
disks.
2. USB floppy. This category is composed by USB external floppy drives.
3. USB ext.CD. This category is composed by USB external CD drive. For these devices some restrictions
apply:
a. only read operations are allowed; this means that, even if the device is a CD writer, it
will not be possible to write on it. For this reason it is not possible to perform a backup
on USB external CD.
b. the device will be identified only if the CD is already inside when the USB is plugged in.
For this reason always insert the CD before to plug the USB cable.
c. wait about 30 seconds after the USB cable has been plugged in before start using the
device. During this time the device will be detected and the table of contents of the
disk will be read.

8.2.3 Restrictions on number of USB devices

The system will manage up to two USB devices at the same time. The third device connected will not be
detected.
It is not recommended to plug two devices of the same type (2 USB key, 2 USB floppy or 2 USB external CD)
because there is not a way to distinguish between them. For this reason never plug at the same time two USB
device of the same type.

8.2.3.1 Automatic selection of the USB device

For backup operations on USB started from the GUI the system will implicitly choose the media between
connected devices.

The rules are the following:

a. if a USB key is plugged it is always choosen.
b. if no USB key is plugged the USB floppy is choosen.
c. if no USB key and no USB floppy are connected an error is raised.

Provided that:
- no more than two different USB devices can be plugged at the same time;
- it is not possible to perform a backup on USB external CD;
the possible scenarios are summarized in the following table.

Device A Device B Choice

USB key USB floppy USB key
USB key - USB key
USB floppy - USB floppy
- - An error is raised
Table 83 - Automatic selection of the USB device

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 231 / 280

8.3 UPGCEPRN V1.5 FOR THERMAL PRINTER CUSTOM TPT112HP

INSTALLATION
8.3.1 Installation procedure
The UpgCePrn v1.5 software is a tool running under Windows environment which is needed to download the
firmware on the thermal printer CUSTOM TPT112HP of Thema4. This chapter describes how to install this
program: The software is delivered as a self-extracting zip file name UpgCePrn.exe which contains the setup
program for the tool. To install the software follow these steps:

1. Run UpgCePrn.exe and provide a temporary path where to put the setup files, then press “Unzip”.

2. At the end of the extraction process the setup will be automatically started. The following dialog box will be
displayed where you can choose “Italian” or “English”, Then press “OK”.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 232 / 280

3. The setup proceedes preparing InstallShied and then displaying a similar screenshot. Press “Next” to
proceede.

4. Read the licence agreement and then press “Yes” to accept it.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 233 / 280

5. Choose a specific destination folder or accept the default one, then press “Next”.

6. Choose the program folder for Windows menu and press “Next”.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 234 / 280

7. An important note about program requirements for the parallel port management is shown. Press “OK” to
acknowledge it.

8. The setup program start copying files needed.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 235 / 280

9. When the setup program finishes the following dialog is shown. Press “Finish” to terminate.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 236 / 280

8.4 FLASHINGUTILITY INSTALLATION

8.4.1 Installation procedure
The FlashingUtility software is a tool running under Windows environment which is needed to download the
firmware on the APS thermal printer of Thema4.
This chapter describes how to install this program:
The software is delivered as a self-extracting zip file name Flashing Utility Setup X.Y.Z.W.exe which is the
installation package of the product. To install the software follow these steps:

1. Run Flashing Utility Setup X.Y.Z.W.exe and press “Next”.

2. Choose the desired menu folder and press “Next”.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 237 / 280

3. Choose for an optional Desktop shortcut and press “Next”.

4. Take a moment to review your settings, then press “Install” to proceed with the installation.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 238 / 280

8.5 UPGCEPRN V2.14 FOR THERMAL PRINTER CUSTOM PLUS4

INSTALLATION
8.5.1 Installation procedure

The UpgCePrn v2.14 software is a tool running under Windows environment which is needed to download the
firmware on the thermal printer CUSTOM PLUS4 of Thema4. This chapter describes how to install this program:
The software is delivered as a self-extracting zip file name UpgCePrn.exe which contains the setup program for
the tool. To install the software follow these steps:

1. At the end of the extraction process the setup will be automatically started. The following dialog box will be
displayed where you can choose “Italian” or “English”, Then press “OK”.

2. The setup proceedes preparing InstallShied and then displaying a similar screenshot. Press “Next” to
proceede.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 239 / 280

3. Read the licence agreement and then press “Yes” to accept it.

4. Choose a specific destination folder or accept the default one, then press “Next”.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 240 / 280

5. Choose the program folder for Windows menu and press “Next”.

6. An important note about program requirements for the parallel port management is shown. Press “OK” to
acknowledge it.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 241 / 280

7. The setup program start copying files needed.

8. When the setup program finishes the following dialog is shown. Press “Finish” to terminate.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 242 / 280

8.6 THEMA4-VHP STERIS PROFIBUS/MPI INTERFACE

INSTALLATION
The THEMA4-VHP STERIS Profibus/MPI interface software is the application that allows the data exchange
between the THEMA4 control system and the VHP-STERIS by the ProfibusMPI interface.
The software is stored in a Micro memory card Simatic S7-300 MMC 128 KB put inside the Simatic S7-300 CPU
314.
It is possible to install the THEMA4-VHP STERIS Profibus/MPI interface software in 2 ways:
- replacing the Micro memory card already programmed
- by the IIDE Siemens Simatic Step 7 v5.4

8.6.1 Installation by replacing the Micro memory card already programmed

The THEMA4-VHP STERIS Profibus/MPI interface software can be installed by the replacing of Micro memory
card with the following procedure.
 Turn off the CPU
 Replace the Micro memory card from the CPU
 Turn on the CPU

8.6.2 Installation by IDE Siemens Simatic Step 7 v5.4

The THEMA4-VHP STERIS Profibus/MPI interface software can be installed by the IDE used for programming
the module CP342-5 with the following procedure:
 Open the Simatic Manager STEP7

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 243 / 280

 Open the project to be loaded in the CPU.

 If the project is not present in the list of projects, import it by the Simatic Manager STEP7

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 244 / 280

 On the project: performs a double click on “Hardware” to open the Hardware configurator

Perform a double click on “hardware”

to open the Hardware configurator

 Load the Hardware configuration following the request of the configurator

Load the hardware configuration

following the request of the hardware
configurator

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 245 / 280

 Select the target CPU

 Select the address of MPI node

The MPI address is inside the project. It

must be greater than the addresses of
the Profibus nodes

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 8 Page 246 / 280

 Select all “Bocks” and press the key to download the

Select all block and download in the

Micro Memory card them by this button

 At the request of load the system data, reply “NO”: at the end of the load the CPU will goes into RUN
mode automatically.

IMPORTANT NOTE
To install the THEMA4-VHP STERIS Profibus/MPI interface software to the Micro memory
card is necessary to use a PC Adapter MPI to connect the STEP7 to the CPU and check that
the communication settings are set in according with the device used (PC Adapter MPU).

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 247 / 280

Section 9 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

9 APPENDIX A – REMOTE GUI INSTALLATION

9.1 - HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
9.2 - INSTALLATION STEPS
9.2.1 - Package
9.2.2 - JRE installation
9.2.3 - TH4RStart installation
9.2.4 - Download of GUI software
9.3 - UNINSTALLATION
9.3.1 - TH4RStart
9.3.2 - Uninstallation of downloaded GUIs

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 248 / 280

9.1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

For correct operation, it is necessary that minimum hardware and software requirements are fulfilled. Such
requirements might depend from the software version being installed and are listed in the User Manual of the
specific software version.

REFERENCE
For details about hardware and software requirements see the User Manual of the specific Wx
software version.

As general hardware requirements, the Remote GUI needs a Windows based PC with a Ethernet adaptor, in
order to connect to the sterilizer.

The Remote GUI software is written in Java language so a Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is required to
execute it.

IMPORTANT NOTE
The Remote GUI is tested with a specific software version so it is mandatory to use the
software version recommended.

Starting from W30 the Remote GUI software is no more delivered separately, but theTH4RStart launcher is used
instead, to download the GUI software directly from the sterilizer. The GUI software is downloaded once the first
time a connection is made and checked for updates every time a connection to the sterilizer is made.
The TH4RStart application is developed in Java language so it also requires a JRE to be installed on the
Windows system. The minimum JRE version required to run TH4RStart is JRE 1.6.0_06, which is also the JRE
version required to run the W30 GUI software.

By the moment that the same PC can be used in theory to connect to sterilizers equipped with different GUI
versions, it is possible that these GUIs require different JRE versions.
For this reason it is possible that more than one JRE has to be installed on the PC that hosts TH4RStart. In this
case only one JRE is the default one (usually the last one installed), others can be reached specifying the full
path to java.exe or requesting the specific JRE version to the default one, by means of special command line
parameters.
TH4RStart automatically learns from the downloaded GUI which JRE version can be used, and tries to start GUI
application with the correct one. If the correct JRE can’t be found an error message is displayed and GUI is not
started.

REFERENCE
Details about installation of JRE and multiple JREs are discussed in paragraph 9.2.2.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 249 / 280

9.2 INSTALLATION STEPS

9.2.1 Package
The Remote GUI software (TH4RStart) is delivered on the software backup CD as described in the paragraph
7.2 of this document, located in the folder REMOTE_GUI. The folder contains one or more setup programs for
the installation of the JRE and a folder named TH4RSTART, which contains the setup program of the TH4RStart
launcher.
Following paragraphs describe installation of these components.

9.2.2 JRE installation

To start the installation of the JRE launch the executable labeled with the corresponding name. For example, to
start installation of JRE 1.5 launch jre-1_5_0_06-windows-i586-p.exe, to start installation of JRE 1.6 launch jre-
6u6-windows-i586-p.exe.
The setup program is composed of several steps, all clearly explained by messages on the screen, which
requires to press confirmation buttons.
If more than a JRE is required on the same PC, all required JRE must be installed. It is possible to install a new
JRE at any time, however the last one installed will generally became the default one.

To check the version of the virtual machines installed on the system execute the command java –version in a
DOS shell, as shown in the following picture.

Figure 85 – Checking default java version

The version printed is the default one (in this case 1.6.0_06).

Starting from JRE 1.5 it is possible to ask to the default JRE to start a different version of JRE. This can be used
to check if different versions of JRE are available, through the command java –version:<id> -showversion:

Figure 86 – Checking a specific java version, which is installed

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 250 / 280

In the example above JRE 1.3.0 is available

Figure 87 – Checking a specific java version, which is not installed

In the example above JRE 1.4.0 is not available.

It is possible to execute a JRE different from the default one also prepending the full path to java.exe:

Figure 88 – Launching directly a non default java version

NOTE
As long as JRE are correctly installed on the Windows based PC, TH4RStart will handle
automatically the task to run the correct version of JRE.

9.2.3 TH4RStart installation

To start the installation of TH4RStart launch the setup program in the folder REMOTE_GUI/TH4RSTART of the
software backup CD.

Figure 89 – TH4RStart software package

The setup program is composed of several steps, explained in this paragraph.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 251 / 280

1. The first step is shown in the following picture. Press “Next” to proceed or “Cancel” to abort installation

Figure 90 – TH4RStart installation, step 1

2. Take a moment to review the Software Licence Agreeement. Press “Yes” to proceed or “No” to abort
installation.
To install the software it is necessary to accept the agreement.

Figure 91 – TH4RStart installation, step 2

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 252 / 280

3.Set the folder where the TH4Rstart has to be installed. Press “Next” to proceed or “Cancel” to abort
installation.

Figure 92 – TH4RStart installation, step 3

4. Setup will create a Start Menu Folder. Press “Next” to proceed or “Cancel” to abort installation.

Figure 93 – TH4RStart installation, step 4

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 253 / 280

5. If you want to Create a desktop icon or a Quick Launch Icon select the boxes. It’s recommended to create a
desktop icon. Press “Next” to proceed or “Cancel” to abort installation

Figure 94 – TH4RStart installation, step 5

6. Take a moment to review the setup information. It is possible to go back to change setup information by
means of the “Back” button. Press “Install” to proceed or “Cancel” to abort installation.

Figure 95 – TH4RStart installation, step 6

7. At the end of installation the following window is displayed, that allows to launch the application. Press “Finish”
to quit the installation program.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 254 / 280

Figure 96 – TH4RStart installation, step 7

9.2.4 Download of GUI software

The first time TH4RStart is started and connected to a specific sterilizer, it checks the software installed on the
sterilizer and downloads the GUI application into a local folder.
The path where the GUI software is downloaded can be controlled by means of the Home Directory parameter of
TH4RStart.

REFERENCE
To learn more about TH4RStart usage and parameters see Appendix B of the User Manual.

This operation is in fact an installation so the user that is running TH4RStart must have write access to the folder
where the Remote GUI will be downloaded.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 255 / 280

9.3 UNINSTALLATION
9.3.1 TH4RStart
It is possible to uninstall TH4RStart by means of Windows’s Control Panel, as shown in the example picture
below.

Figure 97 – TH4RStart uninstallation from Control Panel

A message is displayed to confirm uninstallation.

Figure 98 – Confirmation of TH4RStart uninstallation

Confirmation causes the TH4RStart software to be uninstalled.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 256 / 280

At the end of uninstallation the following picture is displayed

Figure 99 – Uninstallation complete

IMPORTANT NOTE
This procedure will uninstall only TH4RStart. GUI software of specific sterilizers will not be
deleted from Home Directory of TH4RStart. To uninstall them see following paragraph.

9.3.2 Uninstallation of downloaded GUIs

There is no specific uninstall program for downloaded GUIs. To uninstall a downloaded GUI simply delete the
folder named as the factory number of the sterilizer, in the Home Directory of TH4RStart.

As stated in the previous paragraph, uninstalling TH4RStart does not automatically causes the deletion of GUIs
in the Home Directory of TH4RStart. To completely uninstall downloaded GUIs, clean the Home Directory folder
of TH4RStart.

If the Home Directory of TH4RStart is changed, downloaded GUIs are not moved in the new path nor deleted.
To uninstall a GUI downloaded in the previous location of Home Directory, simply delete the folder named as the
factory number of the sterilizer in the old location of Home Directory of TH4RStart.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 257 / 280

Section 10 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

10 APPENDIX B – CONFIGURATION MENU FOR

SOFTWARE VERSIONS PREVIOUS W30
10.1 - CONFIGURATION MENU FUNCTIONS
10.2 - CONFIGURATION MENU ACCESS
10.3- CONFIGURATION MENU NAVIGATION AND
USAGE
10.3.1 - Main menu
10.3.2 - Software installation & update
10.3.3 - Language installation & update
10.3.4 - Database installation & update
10.3.5 - Stations configuration
10.3.6 - Touch screen calibration
10.3.7 - Profibus card configuration
10.3.8 - Authorization management
10.3.9 - On line manuals/help installation & update
10.3.10 - Data Backup
10.3.11 - Archive management
10.3.12 - Special operations
10.3.13 - Exit

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 258 / 280

10.1 CONFIGURATION MENU FUNCTIONS

For the software versions previous W30, the functions of internal CONFIGURATION MENU are displayed in the
following table:

N. Function Sub-function
1 Software installation & update 1.1 PCS installation
1.2 P/G installation
1.3 FECP installation
1.4 GUI installation
1.5 JWORKS installation
1.6 O.S. installation
1.7 BOOTROM installation
2 Language installation & update 2.1 Language installation
3 Database installation & update 3.1 Install from floppy
3.2 Install from network
4 Stations configuration 4.1 Primary station address
4.2 Secondary station address
4.3 Maintenance station address
4.4 Remote stations addresses
4.5 Panel PC subnet mask
4.6 Panel PC gateway
5 Touch screen calibration 5.1 Calibrate touch screen
6 Profibus card configuration 6.1 Load into flash memory
6.2 Configuration install
7 Authorization management 7.1 Load authorization from floppy
7.2 Load authorization from network
7.3 Register software licence
8 Manuals/Help on line installation & update 8.1 Manuals installation
8.2 Help on line installation
8.3 Help on line deletion
9 Backup 9.1 Backup
10 Archive management 10.1 Reset
11 Special operations 11.1 Install kerberos keytab file
11.2 Export alarm used
11.3 Printer management
11.4 LCD management
11.5 Special parameters
Table 84 - THEMA4 CONFIGURATION MENU (W28)

NOTE
To use the RECOVERY DISK an external PC keyboard is needed. It is a PS2 keyboard for all
panel PC except Proface PS3650A, which requires an USB keyboard.

NOTE
For panel PC Proface PS-2000B also connect an external monitor to the VGA port and, if the OS
software version is B1 connect also a PS2 mouse.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 259 / 280

10.2 CONFIGURATION MENU ACCESS

See chapter 5.2 - CONFIGURATION MENU ACCESS.

10.3 CONFIGURATION MENU NAVIGATION AND USAGE

To navigate into the configuration menu use following keyboard keys:

ARROW UP select the previous menu item

ARROW DOWN select the next menu item
ENTER select the menu item, executes an action, allows modification of particular menu
items
ESC stops actions, cancel data typed but not already confirmed

IMPORTANT NOTE
Starting from W27 the system is able to handle different layouts of keyboards.

At the bottom of the screen, a message informs the user about the currently selected keyboard layout and how
to change it.
To change the keyboard layout it is necessary to press togheter the Alt and the Tab key; when the Tab key is
released the next available keyboard is selected.
It is possible to select all keyboards installed in the system, provided that they are supported by the system
codepage (see Language Management in the User Manual), plus the default builtin English US keyboard which
is always present.
For example: for systems with the standard codepage many different keyboard layouts will be available (English
US, English UK, Italian, French, German, Spanish…); for systems with cyrillic codepages only two keyboards will
be available (English US and Russian).

The following picture shows an example of the message at the bottom of the screen.
CONFIGURATION MENU

1. Software installation & update

2. Language installation & update
3. Database installation & update
4. Stations configuration
5. Touch screen calibration
6. Profibus card configuration
7. Authorization management
8. Manuals/Help on line installation & update
9. Backup
10. Archive management
11. Special operations
12. Exit

Press Alt+Tab to change the keyboard layout: English US (builtin)

Table 85 - Keyboard layout message

IMPORTANT NOTE
Once the keyboard has been changed this information is saved in machine state so this
setting will be retained at the next boot, unless system codepage changes (as a
consequence of a software update).

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 260 / 280

10.3.1 Main menu

The main menu shows the following items:
CONFIGURATION MENU

1. Software installation & update

2. Language installation & update
3. Database installation & update
4. Stations configuration
5. Touch screen calibration
6. Profibus card configuration
7. Authorization management
8. Manuals/Help on line installation & update
9. Backup
10. Archive management
11. Special operations
12. Exit
Table 86 - Configuration menu

The highlighted item is the one actually selected.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 261 / 280

10.3.2 Software installation & update

Selecting Software installation & update form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following
submenu is shown:
1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION & UPDATE

1. PCS installation
2. P/G installation
3. FECP installation
4. GUI installation
5. JWORKS installation
6. O.S. installation
7. BOOTROM installation
8. Back
Table 87 - Software installation & update submenu

From this menu it is possibile to update individually software components of Thema 4 System: each menu item
allows the installation of a specific software component.

To install a specific item select it and press ENTER. Then appears another submenu:
1.1 PCS INSTALLATION

1. Install from floppy

2. Install from network
3. Install from USB key
4. Install from USB floppy
5. Install from USB ext.CD
6. Back
Table 88 - Software components installation submenu

NOTE
Please note that items Install from USB key, Install from USB floppy and Install from USB ext.CD
will appear only if the corresponding device is plugged in the USB port. For this reason it is
possible than only items 1 and 2 will be available and items 3, 4 and 5 may not appear or appear
associated to different items.

For example, if a USB key is plugged in the system the menu will behave shortened as the following figure:

1.1 PCS INSTALLATION

1. Install from floppy

2. Install from network
3. Install from USB key
4. Back
Table 89 - Example of software components installation submenu

NOTE
Please note that the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.

REFERENCE
Please refer to chapter 8.2 for important hints about USB devices.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 262 / 280

From the menu it is possibile to select installation media: FLOPPY, NETWORK (using FTP protocol), USB key,
USB floppy (same as FLOPPY), USB external CD.

Install from floppy or in the right half of the screen appears the message “Insert disk and strike a key”.
Install from USB Insert the right disk in the floppy drive and press a keyboard key. If the installation
floppy requires more than one floppy on the right half of the screen will appear a message
such as “Insert disk # an strike a key”. When the installation is finished will appear the
message “Installation terminated”.
Install from network in the right half of the screen appears a prompt asking for FTP connection
parameters. Insert the IP address of the host PC and press ENTER, the user ID of the
FTP login and press ENTER, the password of the FTP login. If parameters are ok, if
the connection is working properly and if the FTP server on host machine is correctly
configured the installation starts. At the end of the installation process appears the
message “Installation terminated”.
Install from USB key in the right half of the screen appears the message “Insert disk on key and strike a
key”. Despite of the message leave the USB key plugged if you want to proceede with
the installation and strike a key. If you feel it is the wrong key you can cancel the
operation by pressing ESC. If the key has been correctly copied then the installation
will start. At the end of the installation process appears the message “Installation
terminated”.
Install from USB in the right half of the screen appears the message “Insert CD and strike a key”. If the
ext.CD CD into the drive is the right one press a key to start the procedure. If you feel it is the
wrong key you can either cancel the operation by pressing ESC or swap the CD and
leave enough time to the CD drive to read the content of the new disk. At the end of
the installation process appears the message “Installation terminated”.
Table 90 - PCS installation media selection

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 263 / 280

10.3.3 Language installation & update

The language installation mechanism has been changed starting from W23.1, this section has been updated to
reflect those changes.
Selecting Language installation & update form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is
shown:
2 LANGUAGE INSTALLATION & UPDATE

1. Language installation
2. Back
Table 91 - Language installation & update submenu

This menu allows to install or update the CUSTOM language.

The CUSTOM language is a special language that the user can modify to display and print customized
messages. This feature is available starting from W23.1 and to be functional the “custom language” option must
be enabled in the authorization file.
When PCS, GUI or P/G are installed also related language file are installed, including CUSTOM language. For
this reason it is necessary to reinstall a customized CUSTOM language after each software installation.
The CUSTOM language is delivered with messages identical to the ENGLISH language and is up to the
customer to change it as needed. After user modification the language can be loaded by means of this menu. If
the option is not enabled the message “THIS FEATURE IS NOT ENABLED” is displayed, otherwise the following
submenu appears:
2.1 LANGUAGE INSTALLATION

1. Install from floppy

2. Install from network
3. Install from USB key
4. Install from USB floppy
5. Install from USB ext.CD
6. Back
Table 92 - Language installation submenu

NOTE
Please note that items Install from USB key, Install from USB floppy and Install from USB ext.CD
will appear only if the corresponding device is plugged in the USB port. For this reason it is
possible than only items 1 and 2 will be available and items 3, 4 and 5 may not appear or appear
associated to different items.
Moreover the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.

REFERENCE
Please refer to chapter 8.2 for important hints about USB devices.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 264 / 280

From this menu it is possibile to select installation media: FLOPPY or NETWORK (using FTP protocol), USB
key, USB floppy (same as FLOPPY), USB external CD.

Install from floppy or system searches over the media to find language files starting with the language
Install from USB code CUS. If the language file can’t be found over the media will appear a message
floppy such as “cus_all.txt not found”. If the complete set of language file is found then the
language is installed.
Install from network in the right half of the screen appears a prompt asking for FTP connection
parameters. Inser IP address of host PC, FTP user ID and FTP password. After
pressing ENTER the system searches over the media to find language files starting
with the language code CUS. If the language file can’t be found over the media will
appear a message such as “cus_all.txt not found”. If the complete set of language
file is found then the language is installed.
Install from USB key in the right half of the screen appears the message “Insert disk on key and strike a
key”. Despite of the message leave the USB key plugged if you want to proceede
with the installation and strike a key. If you feel it is the wrong key you can cancel the
operation by pressing ESC. After pressing a key the system searches over the
media to find language files starting with the language code CUS. If the language file
can’t be found over the media will appear a message such as “cus_all.txt not found”.
If the complete set of language file is found then the language is installed.
Install from USB in the right half of the screen appears the message “Insert CD and strike a key”. If
ext.CD the CD into the drive is the right one press a key to start the procedure. If you feel it
is the wrong key you can either cancel the operation by pressing ESC or swap the
CD and leave enough time to the CD drive to read the content of the new disk. After
pressing a key the system searches over the media to find language files starting
with the language code CUS. If the language file can’t be found over the media will
appear a message such as “cus_all.txt not found”. If the complete set of language
file is found then the language is installed.
Table 93 - Language installation media selection

NOTE
Please note that it is not possible to install the CUSTOM language directly from the CD shipped
from Fedegari (both from network than from external CD, or from a disk-on-key created directly
from it): a specific handling must be made to copy the set of languages directly in the root of the
media.

NOTE
If the system is composed also by a secondary and/or a maintenance then appears a message
asking a confirm to update them also. Secondary and/or maintenance need to be “alive” to be
updated.

WARNING!!
The correct composition of language files is not checked during installation. Problems that
may arise by loading an incorrect set of language files are up to the customer.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 265 / 280

10.3.4 Database installation & update

Selecting Database installation & update form the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is
shown:
3 DATABASE INSTALLATION & UPDATE

1. Install from floppy

2. Install from network
3. Install from USB key
4. Install from USB floppy
5. Install from USB ext.CD
6. Back
Table 94 - Database installation & update submenu

This menu allows to install a new set of equipment databases. The system stores into databases profibus
equipment list, modules list and sensors supported. Even if databases are installed during software installation it
is possibile to update them separately.

NOTE
Please note that items Install from USB key, Install from USB floppy and Install from USB ext.CD
will appear only if the corresponding device is plugged in the USB port. For this reason it is
possible than only items 1 and 2 will be available and items 3, 4 and 5 may not appear or appear
associated to different items.
Moreover the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.

REFERENCE
Please refer to chapter 8.2 for important hints about USB devices.

Install from floppy the system searches over the media to find databases. If them can’t be found over the
or media will appear a message such as “eqdbdef.cnf not found”. If the complete set is
Install from USB found then databases are installed.
floppy
Install from network in the right half of the screen appears a prompt asking for FTP connection parameters.
Inser IP address of host PC, FTP user ID and FTP password. Then the system
searches over the media to find databases. If them can’t be found over the media will
appear a message such as “eqdbdef.cnf not found”. If the complete set is found then
databases are installed.
Install from USB key the system searches over the media to find databases. If them can’t be found over the
media will appear a message such as “eqdbdef.cnf not found”. If the complete set is
found then databases are installed.
Install from USB the system searches over the media to find databases. If them can’t be found over the
ext.CD media will appear a message such as “eqdbdef.cnf not found”. If the complete set is
found then databases are installed.
Table 95 - Database installation & update media selection

NOTE
Please note that it is not possible to install (separately) databases directly from the CD shipped
from Fedegari (both from network than from external CD, or from a disk-on-key created directly
from it): a specific handling must be made to copy the set of languages directly in the root of the
media.

WARNING!!
Software installation is designed such a way that database istalled are fully erased and
reinstalled at every installation. This means that every database installed with this menu will
be erased at the next software update and it will be necessary to reinstall it.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 266 / 280

10.3.5 Stations configuration

See chapter 5.3.6 - Stations configuration.

10.3.6 Touch screen calibration

Selecting Touch screen calibration from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
5 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

1. Calibrate touch screen

2. Back
Table 96 - Touch screen calibration submenu

This menu allows to perform touch screen calibration by selecting item 1 and pressing ENTER.

10.3.6.1 Touch screen calibration - generic

See chapter 5.3.5.1.1 - Touch screen calibration - generic.

10.3.6.2 Touch screen calibration - specific for panel PC SIEMENS PC577, panel PC Proface PS3650A,
PaA-B Versa View 1500P Ser.E and panel PC SIEMENS SIMATIC IPC577C
See chapter 5.3.5.1.2 - Touch screen calibration - specific for panel PC: SIEMENS PC577, Proface
PS3650A, A-B Versa View 1500P Ser.E and SIEMENS Simatic IPC577C

10.3.7 Profibus card configuration

Selecting Profibus card configuration from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
6 PROFIBUS CARD CONFIGURATION

1. Load into flash memory

2. Configuration install
3. Back
Table 97 - Profibus card configuration submenu

This menu allows to perform installation on hard disk and load into flash memory of the Profibus PCI card the
configuration needed to connect the Panel PC to the Profibus peripheral.

By selecting Configuration install the following submenu appears:

6.2 PROFIBUS CARD CONFIGURATION INSTALL

1. Install from floppy

2. Install from network
3. Install from USB key
4. Install from USB floppy
5. Install from USB ext.CD
6. Back
Table 98 - Profibus configuration install submenu

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation installs the profibus configuration on the hard disk and must be done every
time that the profibus peripheral is updated (a module is added or removed).

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 267 / 280

NOTE
Please note that items Install from USB key, Install from USB floppy and Install from USB ext.CD
will appear only if the corresponding device is plugged in the USB port. For this reason it is
possible than only items 1 and 2 will be available and items 3, 4 and 5 may not appear or appear
associated to different items.
Moreover the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.

REFERENCE
Please refer to chapter 9 for important hints about USB devices.

Install from floppy or in the right half of the screen appears the message “Insert disk and strike a
Install from USB floppy key”. Insert the right disk in the floppy drive and press a keyboard key. When
the installation is finished will appear the message “Installation terminated”.
Install from network in the right half of the screen appears a prompt asking for FTP connection
parameters. Insert the IP address of the host PC and press ENTER, the user
ID of the FTP login and press ENTER, the password of the FTP login. If
parameters are ok, if the connection is working properly and if the FTP server
on host machine is correctly configured the installation starts. At the end of the
installation process appears the message “Installation terminated”.
Install from USB key the system searches over the media to find files to be installed. If them can’t
be found over the media will appear an error message. At the end of the
installation process appears the message “Installation terminated”.
Install from USB ext.CD the system searches over the media to find files to be installed. If them can’t
be found over the media will appear an error message. At the end of the
installation process appears the message “Installation terminated”.
Table 99 - Profibus configuration install media selection

By selecting Load into flash memory the profibus configuration stored on the hard disk is loaded into the flash
memory of the PCI profibus card.
6 PROFIBUS CARD CONFIGURATION

1. Load into flash memory

2. Configuration install
3. Back
Table 100 - Loading configuration into flash memory

In the right half of the screen appears the message “Loading…” and when the operation is finished will appear a
message like “Done” or “Done but this is an old file”.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation must be done every time that a new configuration is loaded or if the profibus
card has been replaced with a new one.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 268 / 280

10.3.8 Authorization management

Selecting Authorization management from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
7 AUTHORIZATION MANAGEMENT

1. Load authorization from floppy

2. Load authorization from network
3. Load authorization from USB key
4. Load authorization from USB floppy
5. Load authorization from USB ext.CD
6. Register software licence
7. Back
Table 101 - Authorization management submenu

The authorization “configures” the sterilizer by setting some internal parameters such as: remote GUI
enablement, external recorder enablement, list of P/G’s enabled in the installed library.

IMPORTANT NOTE
Only an authorization file with the same factory number (NF) can be loaded to overwrite the
previous one.

NOTE
Please note that items Load authorization from USB key, Load authorization from USB floppy and
Load authorization from USB ext.CD will appear only if the corresponding device is plugged in the
USB port. For this reason it is possible than only items 1 and 2 will be available and items 3, 4 and
5 may not appear or appear associated to different items.
Moreover the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.

REFERENCE
Please refer to chapter 8.2 for important hints about USB devices.

Load authorization from floppy in the right half of the screen appears the message “checking…” and the
or system searches for authorization over the media. If it can’t be found will
Load authorization from USB appear an error message. When the installation is finished will appear the
floppy message “Installation terminated”.
Load authorization from in the right half of the screen appears a prompt asking for FTP connection
network parameters. Insert the IP address of the host PC and press ENTER, the
user ID of the FTP login and press ENTER, the password of the FTP login.
If parameters are ok, if the connection is working properly and if the FTP
server on host machine is correctly configured the installation starts. At the
end of the installation process appears the message “Installation
terminated”.
Load authorization from USB appears the message “checking…” and the system searches for
key authorization over the media. If it can’t be found will appear an error
message. When the installation is finished will appear the message
“Installation terminated”.
Load authorization from USB appears the message “checking…” and the system searches for
ext.CD authorization over the media. If it can’t be found will appear an error
message. When the installation is finished will appear the message
“Installation terminated”.
Table 102 - Authorization management media selection

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 269 / 280

NOTE
It is not possibile possibile to install on a sterilizer an authorization that has been written for another
sterilizer. The system won’t install it and will show the message “New authorization not valid”.

NOTE
It is not possibile to install the same authorization more than once. The system won’t install it and
will show the message “This authorization has already been installed”.

The item Register Software Licence is available in the Configuration Menu starting from W15 software version.
To register a licence select the item and press ENTER: if the licence has already been registered the S/N is
shown and it is not possible to edit it; otherwise it is possible to type it.
7 AUTHORIZATION MANAGEMENT

1. Load authorization from floppy

2. Load authorization from network
3. Load authorization from USB key
4. Load authorization from USB floppy
5. Load authorization from USB ext.CD
6. Register software licence SN: |
7. Back
Table 103 - Typing serial number

If the serial typed is not correct then an error message is shown. After the second wrong insertion appears a
message informing that it is not possible to type it anymore until a reboot. If the serial number matches it is
accepted and the software is registered.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 270 / 280

10.3.9 On line manuals/help installation & update

The On line manuals installation mechanism has been changed starting from W23.1, this section has been
updated to reflect those changes. Selecting Manuals/Help on line installation & update from the main menu and
pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
8 MANUALS/HELP ON LINE INSTALLATION & UPDATE

1. Manuals installation
2. Help on line installation
3. Help on line deletion
4. Back
Figure 100 – Manuals/help on line installation submenu

This menu allows to install Manuals; Help on line installation and deletion is currently disabled. The On line
Manual is installed separately from the software and requires the option “on line manuals” to be enabled in the
system in order to be able to install it and view it. For more about On line Manual supply see the chapter 7.

To install the Manuals also on a non primary PC, connect both primary and non primary PCs and execute the
Install command; after the download of the Manuals on the primary PC the message press a key to update
secondary is shown in order to start the Manuals installation on the non primary PC.

To install the Manual select Manual Installation, the following submenu appears:
8.1 MANUALS INSTALLATION

1. Install from floppy

2. Install from network
3. Install from USB key
4. Install from USB floppy
5. Install from USB ext.CD
6. Back
Table 104 - Manuals installation submenu
NOTE
Please note that items appear only in the list if the corresponding device is present. For this reason
it is possible that only items 1 and 2 are available and items 3, 4 and 5 may not appear or appear
associated to different items. Moreover the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.
REFERENCE
Please refer to chapter 8.2 for important hints about USB devices.

From this menu it is possible to select installation media: FLOPPY, NETWORK (using FTP protocol), USB key,
USB floppy (same as FLOPPY), USB external CD.

Install from floppy or the system searches over the media to find the installation script. If the script can’t
Install from USB be found over the media will appear a message such as “ERROR”. If the script is
floppy found then the Manual will be installed.
Install from network in the right half of the screen appears a prompt asking for FTP connection
parameters. Insert IP address of host PC, FTP user ID and FTP password. After
pressing ENTER the system searches over the media to find the installation script. If
the script can’t be found over the media will appear a message such as “ERROR”. If
the script is found then the Manual will be installed.
Install from USB key the system searches over the media to find the installation script. If the script can’t
be found over the media will appear a message such as “ERROR”. If the script is
found then the Manual will be installed.
Install from USB the system searches over the media to find the installation script. If the script can’t
ext.CD be found over the media will appear a message such as “ERROR”. If the script is
found then the Manual will be installed.
Table 105 - Manuals installation media selection

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 271 / 280

10.3.10 Data Backup

Selecting Backup from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
9 BACKUP

1. Backup Current Hist

Configuration [ ] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [ ]
Programs [ ] [ ]
Maintenance [ ] [ ]
Access management [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ] [ ]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ]
[ ] ZIP format
2. Back
Table 106 - Backup submenu

This menu allows to perform a backup of machine data by floppy or by network (through FTP protocol) both
using “File format” than “ZIP format”. “File format” is the classical format, “ZIP format” is a new format that stores
files to be backupped in a single ZIP file. This second solution is faster, saves disk space, allows to perform a full
floppy backup on few disks and makes network backup more sure.
However, since “ZIP format” is available and supported starting from software version W15, it is not useful to
perform it for an older version because it will not be possible to restore the generated backup.

10.3.10.1 Selection of data to backup

The first phase is the selection of elements to be backupped.

Item Description
Configuration Machine configuration, current and/or historic.
Cycles Cycles, current and/or historic.
Programs Programs, current and/or historic.
Maintenance Maintenance, current and/or historic
Access Logins, current and/or historic.
management
Audit trail Audit trail (only current).
Process reports Executed cycle report (only historic).
State machine Machine state internal data (only current).
Alarms This item is not actually implemented and will not be possibile to select anything.
System diagnostic Machine diagnostic internal data.
Backup jobs Backup task configured, current and/or historic. This item is available starting from
W23 software release.
Table 107 - Backup submenu elements description

NOTE
Selectable items are the same as shown in the GUI backup page.

WARNING!!
The item “State machine” contains informations such as the number of cycle performed and
the number of successful sterilizations. For this reason it is important to restore them only if
needed, otherwise it may happen to produce a cycle with the same number as an older one.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 272 / 280

10.3.10.2 Selection of current and/or historical data

After the selection of an element, the second phase is the selection of current and/or historical data:

pressing ENTER the first time changes the selection as follows: [x] []
pressing ENTER a second time: [] [x]
pressing ENTER a third time: [x] [x]
pressing ENTER a fourth time: [] []
pressing ENTER again the operations continue in a cyclical way.

With this method it is possibile to fill the table of elements to be backupped.

For some elements there are only current or historical data.

10.3.10.3 Selection of data format: normal files or zipped files

Then, if a “ZIP format” is wanted, select the corresponding row and press ENTER:
[x] ZIP format

Otherwise the format used will be “File Format”.

10.3.10.4 Backup execution

Once the selection is complete it is possible to perform the backup selecting the first row and pressing ENTER.
By selecting the last row and pressing ENTER the backup process will be canceled.
9 BACKUP

1. Backup Current Hist

Configuration [x] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [x]
Programs [ ] [x]
Maintenance [x] [x]
Access management [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [x]
Process report [x]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ] [ ]
System diagnostic [x]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ]
[x] ZIP format
2. Back
Table 108 - Performing the backup

Then the following submenu appears:

9.1 BACKUP

1. Backup to floppy
2. Backup to network
3. Backup to USB key
4. Backup to USB floppy
5. Back
Table 109 - Selecting backup media

NOTE
Please note that items Backup to USB key and Backup to USB floppy will appear only if the
corresponding device is plugged in the USB port. For this reason it is possible that only items 1 and
2 will be available and items 3 and 4 may not appear or appear associated to different items.
Moreover the menu will be updated as you plug\unplug USB devices.
There is not an item Backup to USB ext.CD because writing on CD is not supported.

REFERENCE
Please refer to section 8.2 for important hints about USB devices.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 273 / 280

Backup to floppy or the backup will start on the selected media showing the percentage of completion. If
Backup to USB more than a floppy is needed then will appear the message “Disk full, replace and
floppy strike a key”; insert an empty disk and press a key. At the end of the backup process
will appear the request to insert the first floppy and press enter. When the backup has
finished will appear the message “Backup terminated”. By pressing ESC during
backup the operation will be stopped.
Backup to network on the right half of the screen appears a prompt asking for FTP connection
parameters. Insert IP address of host PC, FTP user ID and FTP password. If
parameters are ok, if the connection is working properly and if the FTP server on host
machine is correctly configured the backup starts showing the percentage of
completion. At the end of appears the message “Backup terminated”. By pressing
ESC during backup the operation will be stopped.
Backup to USB key the backup will start on the selected media showing the percentage of completion. If
more than a USB key is needed then will appear the message “Disk full, replace and
strike a key”; insert an empty disk-on-key and press a key.
Pay attention that for Zip Backup the next USB key must hold as much space as the
previous one. For this reason disk span over USB keys, even if supported, is not
recommended. The better solution is to use a USB key that can hold entirely the
backup.
If more than a USB key has been used at the end of the backup process will appear
the request to insert the first USB key and press enter. Otherwise the backup will
finish normally. When the backup has finished will appear the message “Backup
terminated”. By pressing ESC during backup the operation will be stopped.
Table 110 - Backup media selection

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 274 / 280

10.3.11 Archive management

Selecting Archive management from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
10 ARCHIVE MANAGEMENT

1. Reset Current Hist

Configuration [ ] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [ ]
Programs [ ] [ ]
Maintenance [ ] [ ]
Access management [ ] [ ]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ] [ ]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ]
2. Back
Table 111 - Archive Management Reset submenu

This menu allows to perform a reset of specific categories of machine data.

10.3.11.1 Selection of data to reset

The first phase is the selection of elements to be deleted.
Item Description
Configuration Machine configuration, current and/or historic.
Cycles Cycles, current and/or historic.
Programs Programs, current and/or historic.
Maintenance Maintenance, current and/or historic
Access Logins, current and/or historic.
management
Audit trail Audit trail (only current).
Process reports Executed cycle report (only historic).
State machine Machine state internal data (only current).
Alarms This item is not actually implemented and will not be possibile to select anything.
System diagnostic Machine diagnostic internal data.
Backup jobs Backup task configured, current and/or historic. This item is available starting from
W23 software release.
Table 112 - Archive Management Reset submenu elements description

10.3.11.2 Selection of current and/or historical data

After the selection of an element, the second phase is the selection of current and/or historical data:

pressing ENTER the first time changes the selection as follows: [x] []
pressing ENTER a second time: [] [x]
pressing ENTER a third time: [x] [x]
pressing ENTER a fourth time: [] []
pressing ENTER again the operations continue in a cyclical way.

With this method it is possibile to fill the table of elements to be removed. The selection follows the same rules of
backup selection.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 275 / 280

10.3.11.3 Data reset execution

When the selection has been done it is possibile to start the removal of elements selected by choosing the first
row and pressing ENTER.
10 ARCHIVE MANAGEMENT

1. Reset Current Hist done

Configuration [ ] [x]
Cycles [ ] [x]
Programs [ ] [x]
Maintenance [x] [ ]
Access management [x] [ ]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ] [ ]
System diagnostic [x]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ]
2. Back
Table 113 - Performing the reset

When the reset operation is complete appears the message “Done”.

10.3.11.4 Reset of logins or archives

This menu allows some standard operations such as: reset of logins, reset of archives.

Reset of Logins: by selecting Current and historic Access management data it is possibile to remove every
saved login. At the next boot of the system will be loaded only the standard key SUP 1111. This operation is
useul when all administrators logins have been forgotten.

10 ARCHIVE MANAGEMENT

1. Reset Current Hist done

Configuration [ ] [ ]
Cycles [ ] [ ]
Programs [ ] [ ]
Maintenance [ ] [ ]
Access management [x] [x]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [ ]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ] [ ]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [ ]
2. Back
Table 114 - Performing login reset

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 276 / 280

Reset of archives: by selecting checkboxes in the historic column it is possibile to remove all the past history of
the machine freeing space on the hard disk.
10 ARCHIVE MANAGEMENT

1. Reset Current Hist done

Configuration [ ] [x]
Cycles [ ] [x]
Programs [ ] [x]
Maintenance [ ] [x]
Access management [ ] [x]
Audit trail [ ]
Process report [x]
State machine [ ]
Alarms [ ] [x]
System diagnostic [ ]
Backup jobs [ ] [x]
2. Back
Table 115 - Performing archives reset

By performing both these operations it is possibile for a customer to delete every record generated by Fedegari’s
activity and start with a clean machine.

WARNING!!
Reset of archives is not reversible. Is recommended to perform before a backup of data
being deleted.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 277 / 280

10.3.12 Special operations

Selecting Special operations from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:
11 SPECIAL OPERATIONS

1. Install kerberos keytab files

2. Export alarm used
3. Printer management
4. LCD management
5. Special parameters
6. Back
Table 116 - Special operations submenu

This menu gathers operation that do not fit into other categories of operations that can be found in the
configuration menu. These are shown in the picture above.

10.3.12.1 Install kerberos keytab files

This operation allows to install the keytab file needed to set up a connection to a remote authentication system
(see User Manual for Remote Authentication software option). By selecting this item, the usual menu for the
selection of the installation device is displayed. Select the desired source device and start the transfer.

10.3.12.2 Export alarm used

This operation allows to export in CSV format (encoded as UNICODE) the list of alarms in use in the system
(see User Manual for Configured Alarms section). By selecting this item, the usual menu for the selection of the
destination device is displayed. Select the desired destination device and start the transfer.

10.3.12.3 Printer management

This operation allows to perform a print test on the thermal printer. This print test produces, on the thermal
paper, a printscreen with the codepage of the printer, this allows to check that the printer is operating properly
and the codepage installed (see User Manual for Printing Non Latin Languages section). Please ensure the
thermal printer is connected, it is powered and it is feeded with paper, then start the test.

10.3.12.4 LCD management

This operation allows to perform a communication test with the LCD and to tune display contrast in case of
Matrix Orbital display.
11.4 LCD MANAGEMENT

1. LCD test
2. Change contrast
3. Back
Table 117 - LCD Management submenu

By choosing LCD test, all characters are sent to the display. This allows to check communication with the device,
if the device is working properly and the codepage is currently selected.
In case of Matrix Orbital display it is possible to choose the Change contrast operation, to tune the contrast of
the display. This can be done by typing a number between 1 and 255. Optimum values can vary, but it is
generally near 180.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 10 Page 278 / 280

10.3.12.5 Special parameters

This operation allows to set the value of some low level parameters.
11.4 SPECIAL PARAMETERS

1. Blackout return time

2. Back
Table 118 - Special parameters

The Blackout return time parameter is the time the system waits before to recover from a blackout, after the
electrical power has been turned on. This time is needed for decentralized peripheral to restart, and for analog
inputs to reach a stable value. The default value is 15 seconds, but it might need adjustment due to hardware
tolerances.

10.3.13 Exit
To exit from CONFIGURATION MENU select: Exit: the system will ask to restart the machine.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 11 Page 279 / 280

Section 11 THEMA4 CONTROL SYSTEM

11 APPENDIX C – CONFIGURATION MENU FOR

SOFTWARE VERSION W36.1
11.1 - CONFIGURATION MENU FUNCTIONS
11.1.1 - Special operations

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017

Thema4 control system - Installation Manual - Section 11 Page 280 / 280

11.1 CONFIGURATION MENU FUNCTIONS

For the software version W36.1 only, the Configuration Menu has different Special Parameters to control the
timeout for alarms of Drager sensors. All the other functions are identical to the one of W36 (see chpater 5).

11.1.1 Special operations

Selecting Special operations from the main menu and pressing ENTER the following submenu is shown:

9 SPECIAL OPERATIONS

1. Export alarm used

2. Special parameters
3. Configure System info logging
4. PDF settings
5. Back

Table 119 - Special operations submenu

This menu is identical to the one of W36 except that some more parameters are shown under the item Special
Parameter (see 5.3.10).

11.1.1.1 Special parameters

This operation allows to set the value of some low level parameters.

9.2 SPECIAL PARAMETERS

1. Blackout return time

2. Run Progressive number
3. Sterilization OK number
4. Drager warm-up timeout
5. Drager warm-up after blackout
6. Back
Table 120 - Special parameters

Software version W36.1 has the additional parameters listed below, for other parameters see 5.3.10.

The Drager warm-up timeout parameter controls the behaviour of UNSERVICEABLE and HEATING alarms for
Drager sensors. This kind of sensor need to warm-up some time after power-up before to be ready to work so it
is normally in a temporary fault condition after system startup. To distinguish between a warm-up condition and a
real fault condition a timeout is used with following rules:
- if the parameter is set to 0 there is no timeout, so a warm-up condition activates immediately the alarm
UNSERVICEABLE of the specific Drager;
- if the parameter is different from zero a timeout for each Drager is started as the system is powered-on, and
the HEATING alarm is shown instead of the UNSERVICEABLE alarm if the fault condition is active. If the
fault condition lasts more than the timeout or if the fault condition disappears and appears again during the
timeout, the HEATING alarm is replaced with the UNSERVICEABLE alarm. This allows most of the time to
distinguish between warm-up and real faults.
The Drager warm-up timeout parameter is the timeout value in minutes, the default value is 20, but it is
adjustable between 0 (means disabled) to 60 minutes.

The Drager warm-up after blackout parameter enables/disables the timeout management after a blackout.
Drager sensors are generally powered by means of an UPS, so the warm-up condition happens only
immediately after power-up. If powered without an UPS it is necessary to enable this parameter, in order to
restart the timeout after a blackout, and detect the warm-up condition again.

Fedegari S.p.A. D/O#100978.45- May 2017